| Column header.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – Monitoring data – Data on monitoring. Monitoring type. Monitored value. – Event during monitoring. – Column headers. Column header for time. Column header for limit value type. Column header for limit value. Column header for measured value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.4.4.3.7 XML export - Common Variables XML export – Common variables – Variable value. Variable status: OK = The value is ok and has not been monitored. OKL = The value is ok and has been monitored. LE = The value exceeded the limit and has not been monitored. LEL = The value exceeded the limit and has been monitored..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.4.3.8 XML export - Device data XML export – Device data – Data on device. – Device type. Parameter name. Parameter value. – ... Device name. – ... Device serial number. – ... Device program number. – ... Rack name. – ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – ... Method during recording of the dark and reference spectrum. – ... Determination ID of the recording of the dark and reference spectrum. – ... Calibration date. – ... User during calibration. – ... Calibration method. – ... Determination ID of calibration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – ... Concentration. – ... Concentration unit. – ... Production date. – ... Titer value. – ... Titer unit. – ... Date and time of the last titer determination. – ... Name of the method with which the last titer determination was carried out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – Sensor data – Data on sensor. Type of sensor: XML_SENSOR_OTHER = Other sensor XML_SENSOR_PH = pH sensor XML_SENSOR_ION = ISE sensor XML_SENSOR_METAL = Metal sensor XML_SENSOR_TEMP = Temperature sensor XML_SENSOR_COND = Conductivity sensor – Data on measuring input. Number of measuring input. Type of analog/digital converter.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Calibration method. Measuring input at calibration. 4.4.4.3.10 XML export - Sample solutions (TC conductivity) XML export – Sample solutions (TC conductivity) – Data on sample solution (TC conductivity). – ... Name of the sample solution (TC conductivity). – ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.4.4.3.11 XML export - Method parameters XML export – Method parameters – Data on command. Command type. – Command name. Parameter designation. Parameter value. – <'Parameter name'> Data on tab or parameter. Parameter name. Parameter value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – ... Mean value of the result. – ... Result unit. – ... Absolute standard deviation of the result. – ... ... Relative standard deviation of the result. – ... ... Minimum value of the result. – ... ... Maximum value of the result.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.1 Determination overview - General 4.5.1.1 Determination overview - Overview Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview General The subwindow Determination overview shows selected data for the determinations contained in the open database in tabular form. It is always shown in the program part Database, i.e. it cannot be removed from the Database view. The subwindow can be enlarged and reduced as required; it can also be maximized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Table view With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence. The table view can be adapted with the left-hand mouse button as follows: ￭ ￭ ￭ Drag the border between column titles: Sets the column width. Double-click on the border between column titles Sets the optimal column width. Drag the column title Moves the column to the required location.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Removes the selected column from the table. Move selected column upwards. Move selected column downwards. 4.5.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.1.5 Determination overview - Navigation bar Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview The navigation bar shown below the determination table is used for navigation in extensive tables in which all the determinations cannot be shown at once. It contains the following tools: Jump to the first set of determinations in the table. Jump back to the previous set of determinations in the table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [Page Up] Pages backward within the current set. [Page Down] Pages forward within the current set. [Alt] [End] Jumps to last determination (of all). [Alt] [Home] Jumps to first determination (of all). [Alt] [ ↑ ] Jumps to first data set of previous set. [Alt] [ ↓ ] Jumps to first data set of next set. In the determination table it is not possible to show more than 200 determinations at once.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview ￭ ￭ 4.5.1.8 Several determinations not in sequence In order to select several determinations not in sequence the individual determinations must be selected with the Ctrl key and the left mouse button. The last determination to be selected receives the focus. All determinations With [Ctrl] [A] or by clicking on the uppermost left-hand table field all the filtered determinations within the current set of determinations are selected. The focus is retained.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4 Database Determination overview - Functions Update determination overview Menu item: Database ▶ View ▶ Update The menu item View ▶ Update or the symbol determination table. is used to update the Note The determination table is updated automatically when the database is opened and when a change is made from another program part to the program part Database, but afterwards only when the table is newly sorted or filtered. 4.5.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [More...] Open the dialog window Search – Field selection. All fields are listed in tree-form. A field can be included in the search by marking it and then closing the dialog with [OK]. Details Depending on the data field, under Details further selection fields are dynamically created in order to be able to select the required property. Search options Type Selection of the format type for the fields for which several types are possible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database outside limits It is being searched for values which exceed the limit values defined for the selected fields (values presented in red). Search word Enter a search word for searching the selected data field. For fields of the Type = Date the date can be selected by pressing on [...] in the dialog window Select date. for fields of the type = Text Input 256 characters Definition of a text expression as search word. The last 10 search words are saved and can be selected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Selection Default value Total | Downward | Upward Total Total It is being searched down to the end of the database and then again from above down to the selected data record. Downward It is being searched to the end of the databse. Upward It is being searched to the beginning of the databse.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.4.3 4 Database Determinations - Quick filter Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Quick filter With the menu item Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Quick filter or the symbol a quick filtering for the content of the selected tabular field can be carried out. After this function has been selected the field in the determination table in which the cursor is located will be shown with a colored background during navigation.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Table view The overview table shows all the defined filter criteria and cannot be directly edited. The filter conditions will be numbered automatically in sequence.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.4.7 4 Database Determinations - Save filter Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Special filter... ▶ Special filter - Database "Database name" ▶ [Save filter] ▶ Save filter With the button [Save filter] in the dialog window Special filter - Database "Database name" the dialog window Save filter opens for saving a special filter. All the saved special filters are shown in the upper field. Filter name Name under which the special filter is to be saved.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Selection 'Field name' Filtering is carried out only for the selected field. The 10 most recently selected fields are always available for selection. [Other...] Open the dialog window Filter - Field selection. Herein all fields that can be used for filtering are listed in tree-form. A field can be adopted by marking it and then closing the dialog with [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database out of limits Values that are out of the defined limits for the selected fields will be filtered for (values shown in red). Comparative value Selection or entry of the comparative value for the filter criterion. For fields where Type = Date, the date can be selected by pressing [...] in the dialog window Select date. Only for fields of the type = text Input 256 characters Definition of a text expression as comparison value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.5 4.5.2.5.1 Sign determinations Rules for electronic signatures Program parts: Method / Database In tiamo, methods and determination can be electronically signed at two levels. The following rules apply for this: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 4.5.2.5.2 Signature levels Signature levels for methods and determinations can be signed at two levels (Signature Level 1 and Signature Level 2) by entering the user name and password.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 1 in the Signature Level 1 window. Note Methods or determinations which have been signed at Level 1 can be changed and deleted. If the altered method or determination is saved as a new version then all existing signatures will be deleted automatically, i.e. the method or determination must be signed again. Info Information display for signing and deleting signatures.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open. Note Methods or determinations can only be signed at Level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 4.5.2.5.3 Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method Manager... ▶ Method Manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Signature 2... ▶ Signature Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 2...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 24 characters Input Password Password entry. 24 characters Input Reason Selection from the Default reasons defined in the Security Settings dialog window for the category Signature level 2. Selection from the Default reasons Selection Comment Entry of comment on the signature. 1000 characters Input [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Reason Reason for signature. Signature comment Comment on the signature. 4.5.2.5.5 Delete Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Delete signatures 2... ▶ Delete Signatures Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Delete signatures 2...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6 4.5.2.6.1 4 Database Determinations - Reprocessing Reprocessing - General Dialog window: Reprocess Reprocessing determinations The determinations saved in the database can be reprocessed at any time. The variables, methods, statistics and curve evaluation can be modified and the results recalculated. The reprocessed determination can then be saved in the database as a new version. Note Determinations that have a signature at level 2 cannot be reprocessed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Functions If determinations have been edited in the subwindow Modifications then the following functions can be triggered: [Recalc] Recalculate selected determination(s) with the modifications on variables, method, statistics or curve evaluation made in the subwindow Modifications. During the recalculating a progress bar appears; the recalculating can be interrupted thereby by means of the next to the bar.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.3 4 Database Reprocessing rules Dialog window: Reprocess The following rules apply for reprocessing the selected and modified determinations: ￭ ￭ Number of determinations No more than 100 determinations (including statistically linked determinations) may be selected for reprocessing.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 306 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titration and measuring commands For DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, MEAS, CAL MEAS only the evaluations with existing data will be recalculated, all other parameters will be ignored. For commands that generate data, which are carried out during the determination but are no longer carried out during reprocessing, all the existing values will be deleted.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.4 4 Database Modifications 4.5.2.6.4.1 Modifications - Overview Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Modifications In the subwindow Modifications of the dialog window Reprocessing modifications can be made on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 4.5.2.6.4.2 Variables Modification of the variables used in the selected determination. Method Modification of the method used in the selected determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [Modify] Open the dialog window Modify variable to modify the value of an existing variable. Note If a variable is modified, then with [Recalculate] all the selected determinations will be recalculated with the new value. If one variable is not modified then when several determinations are recalculated the original value of the variable will be used (i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database there. If the dialog window is closed with [OK], the method will be checked (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 394). The modified method then appears on the tab Methods with the addition (modified). This modified method is then applied to the selected determinations with [Recalculate] and can be saved at any time with [Save as]. 4.5.2.6.4.4 Modifications - Statistics Tab: Database ▶ Determination overview ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [Result on/off] Switch the selected single result for the statistical calculations off or on. If the result is switched off, an asterisk (*) appears behind the result value, is it switched on again, the asterisk disappears. However, updating the statistics data always only takes place with [Recalculate]. Note If the results of a determination are switched off, the statistics for these results will be switched off when this determination is recalculated, i.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Command name Selection of the measuring command (command name.index - command type) for which the curve is to be shown for reprocessing. Selection Command name [Edit] The dialog window Curve evaluation opens for manually reprocessing the curve evaluation. 4.5.2.6.4.6.2 Edit curve evaluation Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Set EP with parallel tangents By moving the mouse a point on the curve is selected to which the tangent is automatically applied. At the same time a tangent parallel to it is applied to the other leg of the curve. The two tangents are set with a click of the left mouse button and at the same time a new endpoint is set at the intersection of the middle line of the two tangents with the curve.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Define properties for the graph display The dialog window Properties - Curves # is opened for graph display. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved for the reprocessing window per client. Show EP list The dialog window Endpoints is opened in which all endpoints of the selected curve are displayed in a table. If an endpoint is added to or deleted from the curve then the table will be updated automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Volume Volume value in mL for endpoint. Measured value Measured value (pH) for endpoint. ERC ERC value for the endpoint. Time Time for the endpoint. Temperature Temperature for the endpoint. Note Manually set endpoints only have two measured quantities, for the other measured quantities invalid is entered. [Delete] Delete selected endpoint. [Exit] Close dialog window. 4.5.2.6.4.6.4 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.2 4 Database Properties curve evaluation - x axis Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ x axis On the tab x axis the parameters for the graphical display of the curves on the x axis can be set. Command type Shows the type of command for which the curve properties can be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type for the reprocessing window are saved per client.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Only editable when the option Autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.0E12 ... 1.0E12 Default value 1.0E12 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.3 Properties curve evaluation - y axis Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ y axis On the tab y axis the parameters for the graphical display of the curves on the y axis (left y axis) can be set.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database End value End value for scaling the y-axis. Only editable when the option Autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.0E12 ... 1.0E12 Default value 1.0E12 Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | blue blue Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Selection Default value 5 symbols | No symbol No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Smoothing factor y-axis Factor for smoothing on the y axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Show with original curve on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the original curve (solid line, same color) will be shown in addition to the smoothed curve (dotted line). 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.4 Properties curve evaluation - y2 axis Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | red red Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Selection Default value 5 symbols | No symbol No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.5 Properties curve evaluation - Options Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ Options On the tab Options the parameters for the graphical display of the curves can be set. Command type Shows the type of command for which the curve properties can be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type for the reprocessing window are saved per client.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Show endpoints Show endpoints on | off (Default value: on) If this check box is activated then the endpoints found will be shown on the curve by the symbol ♦ and labeled with EP# (potentiometric endpoint), BP# (break point), FP# (fixed endpoint), HP (HNP), MI (minimum value) or MA (maximum value). Automatic EPs Selection of the color for automatically set endpoints. Selection Default value 13 colors | black black Manual EPs Selects the color for manually set endpoints.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.5.1 Result view - Results overview Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Result view ▶ Result overview In the subwindow Result view of the dialog window Reprocessing the results calculated during the CALC commands and the variables used for are displayed and updated with each recalculation. Per CALC command the following elements are shown: Title Name of the calculation command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.5.2 4 Database Result view - Raw data Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Result view ▶ Raw data On the tab Raw data of the subwindow Result view the raw data generated in commands with evaluations will be shown and updated at each recalculation. If several determinations are selected for reprocessing then the navigation buttons can be used to switch between showing the results of the individual determinations: Jump to first determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.7 Sending determinations to Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Send to... The menu item Determinations ▶ Send to... opens the dialog window Send determinations per E-mail. Selection Default value Determination ID | Sample identification | Name Determination ID Determination ID The name of the export file is formed out of an unambiguous determination ID, the computer name, the date stamp -YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and the suffix for the format.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database All filtered data records All those determinations from the whole determination table are exported that correspond to the set filter. Export template Selection of the Export template for data export. 'Export template' Selection 4.5.2.9 Importing determinations Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Import... ▶ Import determinations With the menu item Determinations ▶ Import...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Note If the check box Comment on modification of determinations in the Security settings is activated, then the window Modification comment determination will appear before the modification is saved. 4.5.2.11 Determination overview - Print Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview… ▶ Print determination overview (PDF) The Menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview... opens the dialog window Print determination overview (PDF).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.12 4 Database Determinations - Print report Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Print ▶ Report... ▶ Report output The menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Report... opens the dialog window Report output. Selection Selection Default value Selected determinations | All filtered determinations Selected determinations Selected determinations If this option is selected, then the reports will be produced for all determinations that are selected (marked) in the determination table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview PDF file on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated the reports are put out as PDF files under the entered file name. Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name. 4.5.2.13 Determinations - Show method Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Show method… The menu item Determinations ▶ Display method...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.14 4 Database Determinations - Displaying history Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Show history Switch history view on/off With the menu item Determinations ▶ Display history... or the symbol only the currently focused determination in the Determination table as well as all the previous versions of this determination will be shown. If the History view with the menu item Determinations ▶ Display history...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview from these measured values. Listed below are the individual measured values and the results for Slope, E(0), c(blank) and Variance. Calibration curve for CAL LOOP Conc Standard addition curve for STDADD In the dialog window Calibration curve/Calibration data a tab marked with the command name showing the standard addition curve and evaluation data will be displayed for each STDADD command (see Chapter 5.6.4.15.1, page 994).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [Templates] Open the dialog window Templates for control charts. Graphics presentation Shows the measured values together with warning and intervantion limits and statistical values according to the settings on the selected control chart. If the cursor is moved to a point then the number, date and value appear as a tooltip. The sorting and the date and time for the first and last point are shown as the legend.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [Templates] Open the dialog window Curve overlay templates. Graphics presentation Shows the curves according to the settings of the selected template. The command type (e.g. DET pH) is shown centrally above the graph. At the right of the curve the legend is shown with the line number in the determination table belonging to the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.20 4 Database Print control chart Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Control chart... ▶ Control chart ▶ [Print (PDF)] ▶ Print control chart (PDF) In the dialog window Print control chart (PDF) the format for the printout of the control chart is indicated. Orientation Selection Default value Portrait | Landscape Landscape Portrait Produces control chart in portrait format. Landscape Produces control chart in landscape format.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information ￭ ￭ ￭ 4.6.2 Configuration Shows general information about the devices, sensors and common variables used. Messages Shows messages about the determination. Determination comment Shows the comment on the determination. Information - Determination Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Determination Display of general information about determination. Identification Information about the identification of the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Regular without messages | Regular with remarks | Stop | Stop by error Selection Regular without messages The determination was finished automatically after the method was processed normally and without any remarks. Regular with remarks The determination was finished automatically after the method was processed normally but with remarks. Stop The determination was stopped manually with [Stop], by a stop criterion or with a SEND command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Program version Display of program version and build number of tiamo with which the determination was recorded. License ID Display of the license serial number with which the determination was recorded. Status/Version Information about the determination version. Determination status: Selection original | modified original Determination data unaltered. modified Determination data modified. Determination version: Version of the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Modification comment determination: User comment on the determination modification. Signature Level # Information about the signatures at Level 1 or Level 2 in chronological order. Signature date: Date and time at which the determination was signed. Signed by (short name): Short name of user who signed the determination. Signed by (full name): Full name of user who signed the determination. Signature reason: Reason for signature selected by user.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Method status: Selection original | modified (live) | modified (reprocessed) original Method when creating the determination. modified (live) Method has been modified live. modified (reprocessed) Method has been reprocessed. Method version: Version of the method the determination was created with. Method saving date: Date and time when the modified method version was saved.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Signature comment: User comments on signing the method. 4.6.4 Information - Sample Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Sample Shows general information about the sample used. Sample data Information about the sample. The only sample data shown is that for which a value is available. Sample size: Value for the sample size. Sample size unit: Unit of sample size. Input date: Date and time at which the sample size was entered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Note If for the sample data variables ID1 … ID16, Sample size, Sample size unit, Sample position a different name is defined from that given in the method variables in the START command then the title shown here will consist of this name with the standard name shown in brackets (e.g. Batch (ID2)). Live modification Information on the last live modification of sample data. Modification reason sample data: Reason for the sample data modification.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Tower: Number of the tower on which a Swing Head is used. Swing Head type: Type of Swing Head attached to tower. Swing Head serial number: Serial number of Swing Head attached to tower. Measuring input: Number of the measuring input (+ designation iConnect for intelligent sensors). ADC type: Type of analog/digital converter. ADC serial number: Serial number of measuring input. Temperature sensor: Type of connected temperature sensor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Solution name: Name of the solution. Concentration: Concentration value and unit of the solution. Production date: Date at which the solution was produced. Titer: Titer value and units of the solution. Date titer det.: Date of the titer determination. Titer method: Method with which the titer was determined. Exchange/Dosing unit: Type of exchange or dosing unit. Name: Designation of exchange or dosing unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Multi-port valve serial number: Display of the serial number of the multi-port valve. Oven program version: Program version of the oven module. Oven serial number: Serial number of the oven module. Detector type: Type of the detector built in the spectrometer. Date dark/reference spectrum: Date and time of the recording of the dark spectrum and the reference spectrum.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Sensor 'Sensor name' Information about the sensor used. Sensor type: Type of sensor (+ designation IS for intelligent sensors). Ion: Ion and valency for ISE electrodes. Order number: Order number of sensor. Sensor serial number: Serial number of sensor. Device: Name of device the sensor is connected to. Measuring input: Number of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected (+ designation iConnect for intelligent sensors).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Calibration method: Shows the method with which the calibration was carried out. User: Shows the user logged in during the calibration or who entered the calibration data manually. Measuring input Shows the measuring input with which the calibration was carried out. a ... e Display of the calibration data a ... e (for the Thermoprobe only). Common variable 'Name' Information about the common variable used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Assignment method: Method with which the value was assigned. Start temperature: Temperature at the start of the determination of the temperature coefficient: Stop temperature: Temperature at the stop of the determination of the temperature coefficient.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Message text: Shows the message. Message source: Shows from where the message comes: Selection Program | Track 'Track name' - Command 'Command name' Program Message that cannot be assigned to a particular command. Track 'Track name' - Command 'Command name' Message produced by a command during the run. 4.6.7 Information - Determination comment Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Determination comment Shows the comment on the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results ￭ 4.7.2 "Command name" Show the results for a single calculation command. A tab with the corresponding command name is provided for each calculation command. Results - Results overview Tab: Database ▶ Result ▶ Results overview On the tab Results overview the results for all calculation commands and (if existent and desired) the corresponding statistical evaluations are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database s(rel): Shows the relative standard deviation for statistically evaluated results. Minimum: Shows the minimum value for statistically evaluated results. Maximum: Shows the maximum value for statistically evaluated results. n: Shows the number of measurements for statistically evaluated results. 4.7.3 Results - Raw data Tab: Database ▶ Results ▶ Results On the tab Raw data the evaluation results of commands with evaluations are shown.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Table 2 Command DET U Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL , mL , 4 EP#.MEA , mV , 1 EP#.TIM , s , 1 EP#.TEM , °C , 1 FP# FP#.VOL , mL , 4 FP#.MEA , mV , 1 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 HP# HP#.VOL , mL , 4 HP#.MEA , mV , 1 HP#.TIM , s , 1 HP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.VOL , mL , 4 MI.MEA , mV , 1 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.VOL , mL , 4 MA.MEA , mV , 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM , °C , 1 BP# BP#.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 MA MA.VOL , mL , 4 MA.MEA , pH , 3 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM , °C , 1 BP# BP#.VOL , mL , 4 BP#.MEA , pH , 3 BP#.TIM , s , 1 BP#.TEM, °C, 1 GP GP.VOL , mL , 4 GP.MEA, pH, 3 GP.TIM, s, 1. GP.TEM, °C, 1 Table 6 Command MET U Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL , mL , 4 EP#.MEA , mV , 1 EP#.TIM , s , 1 EP#.TEM , °C , 1 FP# FP#.VOL , mL , 4 FP#.MEA , mV , 1 FP#.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Table 9 Command SET pH Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL , mL , 4 EP#.MEA , pH , 3 EP#.TIM , s , 1 EP#.TEM , °C , 1 DRI DRI , µL/min , 1 DTI DTI , s , 1 FP# FP#.VOL , mL , 4 FP#.MEA , pH , 3 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.VOL , mL , 4 MI.MEA , pH , 3 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.VOL , mL , 4 MA.MEA , pH , 3 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table 13 4 Database Command KFT Ipol Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP EP.VOL , mL , 4 EP.MEA , mV , 1 EP.TIM , s , 1 EP.TEM , °C , 1 DRI DRI , µL/min , 1 DTI DTI , s , 1 FP# FP#.VOL , mL , 4 FP#.MEA , mV , 1 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.VOL , mL , 4 MI.MEA , mV , 1 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.VOL , mL , 4 MA.MEA , mV , 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 RE# RE#.DRT , mL/min , 4 RE#.DRS , mL/min , 4 RE#.DRC , "empty" , 3 FP# FP#.VOL , mL , 4 FP#.MEA , pH , 3 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.VOL , mL , 4 MI.MEA , pH , 3 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.VOL , mL , 4 MA.MEA , pH , 3 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM , °C , 1 Column 6 Table 18 Column 6 Command STAT U Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 MR MR.MRT , mL/min , 4 MR.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 FP# FP#.MEA , mV , 1 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.MEA , mV , 1 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.MEA , mV , 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM , °C , 1 BP# BP#.MEA , mV , 1 BP#.TIM , s , 1 BP#.TEM , °C , 1 Column 4 Column 5 Table 22 Command MEAS Ipol Column 2: Variable Column 3 EME EME , mV , 1 ETE ETE , °C , 1 FP# FP#.MEA , mV , 1 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.MEA , mV , 1 MI.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 MI MI.MEA , °C , 1 MI.GFL , mL/min , 1 MI.TIM , s , 1 MA MA.MEA , °C , 3MA.MEA, °C, 3 MA.GFL , mL/min , 1 MA.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table 31 4 Database Command MEAS Opt Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 EME EME, mAU, 1 ETE ETE , °C , 1 FP# FP#.MEA, mAU, 1 FP#.TIM , s , 1 FP#.TEM , °C , 1 MI MI.MEA, mAU, 1 MI.TIM , s , 1 MI.TEM , °C , 1 MA MA.MEA, mAU, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM , °C , 1 BP# BP#.MEA, mAU, 1 BP#.TIM , s , 1 BP#.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Table 36 Command STDADD Column 2: Variable Column 3 SLO SLO , mV , 1 ENP ENP , mV , 1 RES RES , "selected unit" , 1 VAR VAR , "leer" , 3 Table 37 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Column 6 Command DOS pH Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 MR MR.MRT , mL/min , 4 MR.MRS , mL/min , 4 MR.MRC , "leer" , 3 Table 38 Command DOS U Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 MR MR.MRT , mL/min , 4 MR.MRS , mL/min , 4 MR.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database "Result" Shows the result name and result value with the defined number of decimal places and units. Note If a result value is monitored and lies within the limit value defined in the CALC command then the text will be shown in green, if it lies outside the limits it will be shown in red text color. Mean value: Shows the mean value for statistically evaluated results. s(abs): Shows the absolute standard deviation for statistically evaluated results.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results 4.7.5 Results - Properties Dialog window Database ▶ View ▶ Properties ▶ Properties ▶ Properties result window In the dialog window Properties result window the information to be displayed in the result window can be selected. Display for results overview Selection of the information to be displayed on the tab Results overview. Results on | off (Default value: on) Shows all results. Statistics on | off (Default value: off) Shows the statistics results.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.8 Subwindow curves 4.8.1 Curves - General Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves Subwindow curves The subwindows Curves 1...5 are subwindows in the program part Database, in which the measuring points generated by the measuring commands for the focused determination in the Determination table are shown as a graph. When navigating in the determination overview this data will be updated automatically (with a certain delay). The subwindows Curves 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves The column Monitoring is displayed as default for STAT and DOS commands and can contain the following entries: Selection Default value _Meas.v. | ¯Meas.v. | _Dos.r. | ¯Dos.r. | _Temp. | ¯Temp. | * * _Meas.v. Lower limit value for measured value monitoring exceeded. ¯Meas.v. Upper limit value for measured value monitoring exceeded. _Dos.r. Lower limit value for dosing rate monitoring exceeded. ¯Dos.r. Upper limit value for dosing rate monitoring exceeded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database lower Lower limit value exceeded. upper Upper limit value exceeded. ok Measured value is inside limits again. [pH]/[U] Measured value limit. Meas.v. [pH]/Meas.val. [U] Measured value at limit violation time. Volume [mL] Dosing volume at limit violation time. Temp. [°C] Temperature at limit violation time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves 4.8.4 Properties 4.8.4.1 Curve properties - Overview Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # The properties for the display of curves can be set on the following 5 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 4.8.4.2 x axis Parameters for the graphical display of the curves on the x axis. y1 axis Parameters for the graphical display of the curves on the y1 axis (lefthand y axis).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Size Selection of the quantity to be shown on the x axis. For DET commands Selection Default value Volume [mL] | Measured value | ERC | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Volume [mL] For MET commands Selection Volume [mL] | Measured value | dMW | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Default value Time [s] For MEAS TC Cond commands Selection Temperature [°C] | Measured value | Time [s] | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value -1.00E+12 End value End value for scaling the x axis. Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value +1.00E+12 4.8.4.3 Curve properties - y1 axis Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # ▶ y1 axis Parameters for the graphical display of the curves on the y1 axis (left-hand y axis).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves For DET commands Selection Default value Volume [mL] | Measured value | ERC | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Measured value For MET commands Selection Volume [mL] | Measured value | dMW | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Default value Measured value For SET, STAT, DOS and KFT commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Volume [mL] | dV/dt [µL/min] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Default value Measured value For MEAS TC Cond commands Selection Temperature [°C] | Measured value | Time [s] | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value -1.00E+12 End value End value for scaling the y1 axis. Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value +1.00E+12 Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | blue blue Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Smoothing Smoothing on | off (Default value: on) Switches smoothing on/off for the curve. Smoothing factor x axis Factor for smoothing on the x axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Smoothing factor y-axis Factor for smoothing on the y axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves Autoscaling on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then all axes in the curve window will be scaled automatically. In this case the fields Start value and End value cannot be edited. Size Selection of the quantity to be shown on the y2 axis. For DET commands Selection Default value Volume [mL] | Measured value | ERC | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database For MEAS commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | dMW/dt | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 | off Default value off For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 | off Default value off For MEAS TC Cond commands Selection Temperature [°C] | Measured value | Time [s] | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | pink pink Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Not editable for MEAS Ref and MEAS Spec commands Selection 5 symbols | No symbol Default value No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Smoothing factor y-axis Factor for smoothing on the y axis. Range Default value 4.8.4.5 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Curve properties - Options Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # ▶ Options Options for graphical display of curves. Command type Selection of the command type for which the curve properties are to be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved per curve window and per client.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Subwindow curves Grid color Selection of the grid line color. Selection Default value 13 colors | gray gray Background Background color Selection of the color for the curve background.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Auxiliary lines Selection of the color for the auxiliary lines. Selection Default value 4.8.4.6 13 colors | blue blue Curve properties - Measuring point list Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # ▶ Options Parameters for showing the measuring point list. Command type Selection of the command type for which the curve properties are to be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved per curve window and per client.
4.8 Subwindow curves ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up and down. 378 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 5 Method 5.1 Method - General 5.1.1 Method - Definition Program part: Method Definition In tiamo a method is an instruction for processing a sample, which can be created in the program part Method and be started in the program part Workplace. Structure Each method contains tracks consisting of individual commands. Track Track Command Command Command Command Management Methods are organized in Method groups and are always automatically assigned a new version i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General further modifications. Methods are stored in the configuration database and globally accessible for all clients. 5.1.2 Method - Desktop Program part: Method Method Symbol Clicking on the method symbol in the vertical bar on the left opens the program part Method while, at the same time the method symbol is shown in color. The upper left corner of the symbol contains a black field displaying the number of methods currently opened (see Chapter 5.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1.3.2 5 Method Method - Menu File Program part: Method New… Create a new method (see Chapter 5.2.1, page 385). Open… Opens an existing method (see Chapter 5.2.2, page 385). Save Save the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 394). Save as… Save the selected method under a new name (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 394). Close all Close all opened methods (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 397). Exit Close the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 397).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General Insert Inserts the content of the clipboard (commands, tracks) above the selected command or on the right hand side of the selected track. Delete Deletes selected elements (commands, tracks). Comment… Newly enter or edit a comment on the selected command.(see Chapter 5.2.4.2.9, page 393). 5.1.3.4 Method - Menu View Program part: Method Split vertically Splits method window vertically and display two methods side by side (see Chapter 5.2.3.2, page 388).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Save Save the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 394). Exit Close the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 397). Method manager… Opens the method manager (see Chapter 5.3.1, page 398) Method groups… Opens the method groups manager (see Chapter 5.4.1, page 409). Print (PDF)... PDF file output of the method report (see Chapter 5.2.8, page 397). Method check Check the selected method for plausibility (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 394).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General Split horizontally Splits method window horizontally and display two methods below each other (see Chapter 5.2.3.3, page 388). Unsplit Undoes the splitting of the method window (see Chapter 5.2.3.1, page 388). Logout… Logout user (see Chapter 2.2.3, page 18). tiamo Help Open tiamo Help. 5.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 5.2 Method editor 5.2.1 Creating new method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ New… With the symbol or with the menu item File ▶ New... the window New method is opened in which a method template can be selected for the new method. Templates Selection Default value Method templates | Blank method Blank method Method templates Selecting a method template as a basis for creating a new method. Blank method A template, containing only the commands START and END, is loaded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor Name Name of the method. Saved Date and time when the method was saved. User Short name of the user who saved the method. Full name Full name of the user who saved the method. Version Version number of the method. Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. Level 1 The method has been signed electronically at level 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method program; the number of currently opened methods is displayed in the left upper corner of the method symbol. Note A maximum of 9 methods can be opened but only two can be displayed at the same time (see Chapter 5.2.3.1, page 388). 5.2.3 Select method Program part: Method The number of the currently opened methods is displayed in the left upper corner of the method symbol. If 2 or more methods are opened, then these two methods, which can displayed either (see Chapter 5.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2.3.1 Display single method Menu item: Method ▶ View ▶ Unsplit In the default settings, the most recently opened method is displayed singularly in the main window. If the display of two methods is switched on, the display can be changed to only one method with the icon menu item View ▶ Unsplit. 5.2.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection 5.2.4 5.2.4.1 Fit to window Adjust to both height and width of the window. Edit method Edit tracks Program part: Method The following functions for tracks are available for a method currently opened in the main window: 5.2.4.1.1 Insert new track Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New track... With the icon or the menu item Insert ▶ New track...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2.4.1.3 Move track Program part: Method ▶ Method window Move track with Drag&Drop To move a track with Drag&Drop it has to be selected first. It can then be moved to the desired position with left mouse button pressed. A red vertical arrow indicates the possible positions. Move track via the clipboard To move a track via the clipboard it has to be cut first. It can then be inserted to the right of the selected track. 5.2.4.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2.4.1.5 5 Method Cut track Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Cut The selected track is moved to the clipboard with Edit ▶ Cut, the contextsensitive menu item Cut or with the icon 5.2.4.1.6 . Insert track Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Insert The track copied to the clipboard is inserted to the right of the selected track with Edit ▶ Paste, the context-sensitive menu item Paste or with the icon . 5.2.4.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor ￭ ProcessLab DIGITAL IN, DIGITAL OUT, ANALOG IN, ANALOG OUT, STEPPING MOTOR, PORT The new command is inserted above the selected command after confirming the selection with [OK]. 5.2.4.2.2 Select command Subwindow: Method A command is selected with a left mouse click. The selected command is marked with a black border.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2.4.2.5 5 Method Cut command Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Cut The selected commands are moved to the clipboard with Edit ▶ Cut the context-sensitive menu item Cut or with the icon 5.2.4.2.6 . Insert command Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Insert The commands copied to the clipboard are inserted above the selected command with Edit ▶ Insert, the context-sensitive menu item Insert or with the icon . 5.2.4.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor Command without comment 5.2.5 Command with comment Checking method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method check With the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method check a method check for the method in focus is triggered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method comment) the table can be sorted according to the selected column in increasing or decreasing order. Name Name of the method. Saved Date and time when the method was saved. User Short name of the user who saved the method. Full name Full name of the user who saved the method. Version Version number of the method. Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor Note The method name must be unique in the whole Client/Server system. [Save] Save the selected method under the desired method name in the selected method group. The method check is automatically carried out before saving the method - it can also be started manually at any time (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 394). The method is checked as thoroughly as possible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2.8 5 Method Print method report Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Print (PDF)… With menu item File ▶ Print (PDF)… or the symbol the window Print method reports (PDF) is opened in which the desired report for the selected method can be selected and output as PDF file. Report selection Selection of the method report to be put out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods 5.3 Managing methods 5.3.1 Managing methods Dialog window Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager… ▶ Method manager With the symbol or with File ▶ Method manager... the dialog window Method manager is opened where a user with the corresponding access right is allowed to manage the methods. Method group Method group Selection of the Method group for which the methods should be displayed in the table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. Level 1 The method has been signed electronically at level 1. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. If the method is edited and saved again, a new version is created and all the signatures will be deleted. Level 2 The method has been signed electronically at level 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Show signatures… Show all signatures of the selected method (see Chapter 5.3.10.4, page 406). Delete signatures 2… Delete all signatures at level 2 of the selected method (see Chapter 2.3.5, page 24). [History] Opens the dialog window Method history of the selected method (see Chapter 5.3.11, page 408). [Exit] Closes the dialog window and saves entries. 5.3.2 Renaming method Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Manage method...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Method group Selection of the method group to which the selected methods should be moved. Method groups Selection Note Locked methods (methods signed at Level 2) cannot be moved. 5.3.5 Deleting method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete The selected methods and all method versions are deleted with the menu item [Edit] ▶ Delete....
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods 5.3.7 Exporting a method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Export… The selected methods can each be exported as a file named 'Method name'.mmet with the menu item Edit ▶ Export.... The window Select directory for export opens in which the directory for export must be selected. Note The exported methods are stored uncoded but with a checksum. If a file stored in this manner is manipulated, then it cannot be imported again.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The method name must be unique in the whole Client/Server system. Locked methods cannot be renamed. Renaming the method is not regarded as modification i.e. the method version does not change. 5.3.10 5.3.10.1 Signing methods Rules for electronic signatures Program parts: Method / Database In tiamo, methods and determination can be electronically signed at two levels. The following rules apply for this: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods 5.3.10.2 Signature Level 1 Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 or Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method Manager... ▶ Method Manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 1 in the Signature Level 1 window. Note Methods or determinations which have been signed at Level 1 can be changed and deleted.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Reason Selection from the Default reasons defined in the Security Settings dialog window for the category Signature level 1. Selection from the Default reasons Selection Comment Entry of comment on the signature. 1000 characters Input [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open. Note Methods or determinations can only be signed at Level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 5.3.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Signature 2 not possible (signature 1 missing) The selected method or determination cannot be signed at Level 2 as it has not yet been signed at Level 1. Signature not possible (accessed by other client) The selected method or determination cannot be signed as it is already marked to be signed on a different client. User Entry of the user name (short name). 24 characters Input Password Password entry.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Signature date Date and time at which the method was signed. User Short name of the user who signed the method. Full name Full name of the user who signed the method. Reason Reason for signature. Signature comment Comment on the signature. 5.3.10.5 Delete Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Delete signatures 2... ▶ Delete Signatures Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Delete signatures 2...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods [Delete] Delete Signatures 2. Note Signatures 2 can only be deleted if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 5.3.11 Showing method history Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [History] ▶ Method history The dialog window [Method history] showing a table with all versions of the selected method is opened with the button History. Name Name of the method. Version Version number of the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Make current] Restores the selected method version as the current method version. This creates a new method whose version number is increased by +1 compared with the last version to have been saved 5.4 Method groups 5.4.1 Manage method groups Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method groups… ▶ Method groups With the symbol or with the menu item File ▶ Method groups...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.4 Method groups [Delete] Deleting the selected method group. 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 Edit method groups Method groups - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method groups... ▶ Method groups ▶ Properties Method group 'Name' The properties window [Properties - Method group 'Name'] for the selected method group is opened with the button Properties or by doubleclicking on the line in the table. The parameters for the method groups are configured on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ 5.4.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The user group Administrators always has both access rights, i.e. they cannot be disabled. User group Names of the user groups Execute on | off (Default value: on) Authorization to start methods from a method group. Methods in this group can only be opened and started but can not be edited or deleted. Edit on | off (Default value: on) Authorization to edit methods from a method group. Methods in this group can be opened, started, edited and deleted.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks Presentation The individual tracks are arranged side by side in the method window. The track name is displayed in the START or TRACK command, respectively, as well as in the END command. 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 Track types Main track Subwindow: Method The main track contains the main sequence of the method and exists in each method. It starts with a (see Chapter 5.6.2.2, page 423) and finishes with an (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 437).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5.2.2 5 Method Normal track Subwindow: Method A normal track is a track that can be created manually by the user with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Normal track or with the icon . It starts with a start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.3, page 432) and finishes with an end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 437). Normal tracks can be called up with the command CALL and entering the corresponding name. Branching and parallel processes can be implemented this way.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks ￭ Parallel running normal track If the check box Return immediately in the (see Chapter 5.6.2.3, page 432) command is activated, then the corresponding command will be be highlighted with an arrow (see below). The execution of the commands in the normal track is started when this track is called, but it sends an acknowledgement immediately to the track containing the corresponding (see Chapter 5.6.10.3, page 1183) command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5.2.4 5 Method Series end track Subwindow: Method A series end track is a track that can be created manually with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Series end track or with the icon . It starts with a start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.5, page 434) and finishes with an end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 437). Only one series end track can be inserted per method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks 5.5.2.5 Exit track Subwindow: Method An exit track is a track that can be created manually with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Exit track or with the icon . It starts with the start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.6, page 435) and finishes with a end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 437). Only one exit track can be inserted per method. The exit track is executed as soon as all normal tracks and the main track have finished or if the determination has been stopped manually.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The error track is executed if the determination is stopped due to an error. In this case the error track takes over the function of the Main track. Normal tracks can be called from error tracks as well. 5.5.3 Edit tracks Subwindow: Method The following functions for tracks are available for a method currently opened in the main window: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6 Commands 5.6.1 Commands - General 5.6.1.1 Definition and Presentation Subwindow: Method Definition A command is a part of a track with the following general properties: ￭ ￭ Command type Each Command type defines the function of the command. The designqtion of the command type (short description in capital letters) cannot be changed. Command name Each command has a freely selectable command name which must be unique within the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.1.2 5 Method Green Titration and measurement commands Yellow Sample Processor and dosing commands Blue All other commands Edit commands Subwindow: Method The following processing functions for commands are available for a method currently opened in the main window: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 420 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ CALC Calculation of intermediate and end results, titer values and common variables. CALL Calling tracks (subprograms). CTRL Setting remote output lines. DATABASE Storage of the determination data in data bases. DET Dynamic equivalence point titrations. DIGITAL IN Reading in all analog inputs. DIGITAL OUT Reading in all analog inputs. DOS pH Controlled dosing with the measured quantity pH.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method MET Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations. MOVE Moving to a rack position or an external position. PORT Change the port position on a multi-port valve PREP Preparing a exchange or dosing unit. PUMP Switching on/off the connected or built-in pumps. Rack Initialization of the rack attached. RECEIVE Waiting for event messages or status messages. REPORT Output of a report defined by a report template.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.2 5.6.2.1 STDADD dos Standard addition with addition of the standard addition solution from a dosing device. STDADD man Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution. STEPPING MOTOR Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution. STIR Controlling a connected stirrer. SWING Swinging of the robotic arm (with Swing Head only). TET Thermometric titrations. TRACK Start command for normal track.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.2.2 5.6.2.2.1 5 Method START START - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ START ▶ Properties.. ▶ START 'Command name' Start command for main track. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command START are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General General settings for the method run. Application note Writing an application note which is displayed when starting a determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Identification Description In the following lines you will find the method variables (sample data) present in the default settings which appear in the Run subwindow and which can be edited and deleted in the START command of the corresponding method. 5.6.2.2.2 Sample size.VAL Value of 'Sample size' (Number) Sample size.OVF Exceeding limit for 'sample size' (Number) Unit.VAL Value of 'Unit'. (Text) Unit.OVF Exceeding limit for 'unit' (Number) Sample position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The selected workplace view will only be opened when starting a single determination or starting the first determination of a series. It will not be opened when a new method within a determination series is being loaded . Track display for live window Live display 1 Selection of the track to be displayed in the subwindow Live display 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Conditioning Automatic conditioning on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the conditioning will be started automatically at the start of a determination for all commands with activated conditioning (SET, KFT, KFC and BRC). After the track with the conditioning command has been finished, conditioning is started again automatically and will be continued even after the end of the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Type, Assignment or Value) the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either ascending or descending sequence. The meaning of the columns see Method variables (Details), page 427. [New] Opens the dialog window Method variable - New in which a new method variable can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.2.2.5, page 427). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Method variable - 'Name' in which the method variable selected in the table can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.2.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note The name of the assigned method variables is displayed automatically for the sample data variables ID1 … ID16, Sample size, Unit, Sample position in the subwindow Run on the tab Single determination and in the subwindow Information on the tab Sample. Fixed value on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the method variables can be assigned a fixed value. For variables of the type Date/Time, the date must be entered in the dialog window 2.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Variable monitoring Note Is displayed only for method variables of the types Number or Date/ Time. on | off (Default value: off) The limits for the variable will be monitored while the determination is running if this option is enabled. Lower limit Lower limit for the variable. Type = Number Input 10 digits Type = Date/Time Selection 'Date' Upper limit Upper limit for the variable.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Display message on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, all active tracks are stopped and the message defined in the text box will be displayed in the event that the limits are exceeded. Record message on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be documented in the determination if the limits are exceeded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop determination If this option is selected, then the current determination (or conditioning) will be stopped. The next determination of the series will be started afterwards. Stop determination and series If this option is selected, then the current determination (or conditioning) will be stopped. The next determination of the series will not be started afterwards. 5.6.2.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Input 200 characters Password Password for the access to the mail server. This password does not necessarily have to be identical to the Windows password. Input 200 characters Mail from E-Mail address of the sender. Input 200 characters SMTP server Address of SMTP mail server. Input 200 characters POP3 server Address of POP3 mail server. Input 5.6.2.3 200 characters TRACK Dialog window: Method ▶ TRACK ▶ Properties..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Return immediately on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the program does not wait for this track to be completed, but rather sends an acknowledgement immediately to the track with the CALL command. From now on, both tracks will be running simultaneously. Delete old data on | off (Default value: off) All data previously generated by a track will be deleted at each new start of this track when this option is activated.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Live display on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the track will be shown in the live display. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SERIE START and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.2.5 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SERIES END and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.2.6 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.2.7 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended ERROR Dialog window: Method ▶ ERROR ▶ Properties.. ▶ ERROR 'Command name' Start command for error track.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.2.8 5 Method END Dialog window: Method ▶ END ▶ END -'Command name' End command for all tracks. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The END command does not have any parameters. It is created automatically at the end of a track when a new track is inserted. Command variables No command variables are generated in the method run by the END command. 5.6.3 5.6.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2 5.6.3.2.1 DET DET - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Command for Dynamic Equivalence Point Titrations. Principle With this command titrations with dynamic incremental reagent addition are carried out. The volume increments vary as a function of the slope of the curve. An attempt is made to achieve constant measured value modifications with each dosing.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The figure shows that the evaluation also requires measuring points from the measuring point list after the equivalence point as well. For the recognition of the EPs found, the set EP criterion is compared with the ERC (Equivalence point Recognition Criterion) found. The ERC is the first derivative of the titration curve combined with a mathematical function which is more sensitive for flat jumps than for steeper ones.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.2 5.6.3.2.2.1 DET pH DET pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties.. ▶ DET pH - 'Command name' Command for dynamic equivalence point titrations with potentiometric pH measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .BP{x}.ERC ERC or first derivative for the break point × (1…9) .BP{x}.MEA Measured value for the break point × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{x}.TEM Temperature for the break point × (1…9) in °C .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point × (1…9) in s .BP{x}.VOL Volume for the break point × (1…9) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 442 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.ERC ERC for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .HP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.2.2 Identification Description .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command DET pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855. Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value pH Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -20.000 ... 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.2.2.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s DET pH - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Dosing of increments Note The following parameters will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measuring point density A small value means small volume increments, i.e. a high measuring point density.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 5 Method 0.1 ... 9999.9 µL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 5 Method 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.2.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) With this option set up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.2.7 DET pH - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/mL 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer break-points will be found.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window = Measured value pH Range -20.0 ... 20.0 pH Default value 20.0 pH Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 5.6.3.2.2.8 -20.000 ... 20.000 20.000 DET pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.2.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.3 5.6.3.2.3.1 Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL DET U DET U - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ DET U - 'Command name' Command for dynamic equivalence point titrations with potentiometric voltage measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ 5 Method Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DET U and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 468 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .EP{x}.TIM Time in s until the endpoint × (1…9) is reached .EP{x}.VOL Volume for the endpoint × (1…9) in mL .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.3.2 Identification Description .SVM Start volume measured value (volume which was added according to the start measured value given in the start conditions) in mL .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method fast For less critical rapid titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method if the change of direction in the potential jump region is very abrupt, as otherwise it is easy to add too large a volume in the equivalence point region. The value should not be less than 1/100 cylinder volume. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 9999.9 µL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.3.5 DET U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Selection 5 Method off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Potentiometric evaluation Selection Default value Evaluation without window | Evaluation with measured value window (U) | Evaluation with volume window (mL) Evaluation without window Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized. ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.3.7 DET U - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.3.8 DET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.2.3.9 DET U - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.4 5.6.3.2.4.1 Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL DET Ipol DET Ipol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ DET Ipol - 'Command name' Command for Dynamic Equivalence Point Titrations with voltametric measurement (selectable polarization voltage).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ ￭ 5 Method Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DET Ipol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 494 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.ERC ERC for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.4.2 Identification Description .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command DET Ipol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 1 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.0 µA (Increment: 0.5) 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands maximum Selection Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999 mV/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for the Measured value acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring point density A small value means small volume increments, i.e. a high measuring point density. The curve then shows all the finest details which also include noise; this could cause unwanted equivalence points to be found. A larger value, i.e. a smaller measuring point density, permits quicker titrations. If you are using a dosing device with a small cylinder volume then a smaller measuring point density value may be beneficial.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. This value is used for temperature correction in pH measurements. 5.6.3.2.4.5 Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop measured value Stops when the preset value for a measuring point has been exceeded or not achieved since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV off off Stop EP The titration is stopped when the specified number of equivalence points has been found. Range Default value Selection 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.4.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum DET Ipol - Potentiometric evaluation Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation without window EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window Measured value # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered. [Properties] Opens the dialog window Measured value # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.4.9, page 515). [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. Evaluation with volume window (mL) [New] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.4.11, page 518). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.4.11, page 518). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Break-point evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Break-point evaluation on | off (Default value: off) A break-point evaluation is used to determine sharp changes of direction in the titration curve. EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value -2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV -2000.0 mV Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value 5.6.3.2.4.8 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2000.0 mV DET Ipol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2000.0 mV Titrino Range Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV 2000 mV EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method tionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized. Only one endpoint will be recognized per window. Lower limit Lower limit for the volume window. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Upper limit Upper limit for the volume window. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.4.11 DET Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Volume Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.2.5 5.6.3.2.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command DET Upol are configured in the following 7 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 520 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .EP{x}.ERC ERC for the endpoint × (1…9) .EP{x}.MEA Measured value for the endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .EP{x}.MEP Quantity of endpoints in the window × (1…9); 1 = 1 endpoint, 2 = 2 or more endpoints, 3 = EP corrected with Autodrift, 4 = EP corrected with manual drift .EP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.ERC ERC for the last measuring point in the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.5.2 .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVM Start volume measured value (volume which was added according to the start measured value given in the start conditions) in mL .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.5.3 DET Upol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -200.0 ... 200.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.2.5.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s DET Upol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 99.90 µA/min 20.00 (slow), 50.00 (optimal), 80.00 (fast) µA/ min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.05 ... 99.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Dosing of increments Note The following parameters will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands otherwise it is easy to add too large a volume in the equivalence point region. The value should not be less than 1/100 cylinder volume. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 9999.9 µL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.2.5.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) With this option set, up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized. Per window only one EP will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Titrino Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The following additional methods for evaluation of titration curves can be activated and defined on this tab: Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | Volume | Time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -200.0 ... 200.0 µA Default value -200.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.10.4, page 878). Initial volume Volume which is present in the measuring vessel before the command is started. Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.99 mL 50.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.5.9 DET Upol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window# Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.2.5.10 DET Upol - Volume window Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with volume window (ml) ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Volume window # Volume windows are defined sub-regions (windows) on the volume axis for which different parameters for the potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.2.5.11 DET Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note This command is suited for titrations with relatively high signal fluctuations or suddenly occurring potential jumps and for slow titrations or slowly responding electrodes. Evaluation The equivalence points (EPs) are localized by a procedure based on the Fortuin method which has been adapted by Metrohm for numerical methods. A search is made for the largest measured value modification (∆n).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.3.3.2 5.6.3.3.2.1 MET U Potentiometric voltage measurement with metal electrodes (measured quantity voltage U). MET Ipol Voltametric measurement with selectable polarization current (measured quantity voltage U). MET Upol Amperometric measurement with selectable polarization voltage (measured value current I). MET pH MET pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ ￭ 5 Method Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MET pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 548 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .EP{x}.TEM Temperature for the endpoint × (1…9) in °C .EP{x}.TIM Time in s until the endpoint × (1…9) is reached .EP{x}.VOL Volume for the endpoint × (1…9) in mL .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.DME Measured value differential for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3.2.2 Identification Description .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVM Start volume measured value (volume which was added according to the start measured value given in the start conditions) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value pH Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 9.999 pH/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible. This could however also lead to an increase in noise, which could result in unwanted EPs. optimal Parameter set for all standard titrations; optimized for the most frequent applications. fast For less critical rapid titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 (slow, optimal, fast) ... 999999 s 0 (slow, optimal, fast) s Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method 0.001 ... 9.999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 5 Method 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.3.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) With this option set up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) [New] Opens the dialog window Measured value # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.2.9, page 569).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/mL 1.0 pH/mL Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/mL 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer break-points will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.10.4, page 878). Procedure Selection of the Gran procedure. Selection Default value Normalized | Standard Normalized Initial volume Volume which must be present in the measuring vessel before the command is started.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.2.9 5 Method MET pH - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window (pH) ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window# Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.2.10 MET pH - Volume window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Devices This command can be executed with the following devices: Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 857, 888, 904, 905, 906, 907 Titrino: 702, 716, 721, 736, 751, 785, 794, 798, 799 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MET U are configured in the following 7 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method .BP{x}.MEA Measured value for the break point × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{x}.TEM Temperature for the break point × (1…9) in °C .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point × (1…9) in s .BP{x}.VOL Volume for the break point × (1…9) in mL .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 574 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .GP.VOL Volume for the Gran endpoint in mL .GP.MEA Measured value for the Gran endpoint in the unit of the measured value .GP.TEM Temperature for the Gran endpoint in °C .GP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3.3.2 MET U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command. This parameter is displayed only for 751, 785, 798 and 799. 5.6.3.3.3.3 MET U - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 5.6.3.3.3.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s MET U - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Parameters defining the run of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing of increments Note The following parameters will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Volume increment Small volume increments are used for the determination of blank values or for very asymmetrical curves. A good guideline is 1/20 of the expected EP volume. For steep jumps the volume increment should tend toward 1/100 and for flat jumps toward 1/10 of the EP volume.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. This value is used for temperature correction in pH measurements. 5.6.3.3.3.5 Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C MET U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV off off Stop EP The titration is stopped when the specified number of equivalence points has been found. Range Default value Selection 1 ... 9 9 off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.3.6 5 Method MET U - Potentiometric evaluation Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters for the potentiometric evaluation of the titration curve with automatic equivalence point recognition are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrino Selection Default value all | greatest | last | off all Titrando, 855 Selection Default value all | greatest | last | ascending | descending | off all all All equivalence points will be recognized. greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.3.10, page 595). [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.3.7 MET U - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Figure and parameters: see DET U - Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the selected line. pK/HNP evaluation pK/HNP evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the pK value is determined from the titration curve which corresponds to the pH value at the half neutralization point (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.1, page 875).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Break-point evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Break-point evaluation on | off (Default value: off) A break-point evaluation is used to determine sharp changes of direction in the titration curve. EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value -2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV -2000.0 mV Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value 5.6.3.3.3.8 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2000.0 mV MET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2000.0 mV Titrino Range Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV 2000 mV EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Range Default value 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Lower limit Lower limit for the volume window. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Upper limit Upper limit for the volume window. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.3.11 5 Method MET U - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Volume Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MET Ipol are configured in the following 7 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .EP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the endpoint × (1…9) .EP{x}.MEA Measured value for the endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .EP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 600 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .HP{x}.TIM Time in s until the HNP × (1…9) is reached .HP{x}.VOL Volume for the HNP × (1…9) in mL .IGF Initial gas flow (measured value at the time of the start of the command) in mL/min .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command. This parameter is displayed only for 751, 785, 798 and 799. 5.6.3.3.4.3 MET Ipol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 5.6.3.3.4.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s MET Ipol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for the Measured value acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing of increments Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Volume increment Small volume increments are used for the determination of blank values or for very asymmetrical curves. A good guideline is 1/20 of the expected EP volume. For steep jumps the volume increment should tend toward 1/100 and for flat jumps toward 1/10 of the EP volume.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. This value is used for temperature correction in pH measurements. 5.6.3.3.4.5 Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C MET Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV off off Stop EP The titration is stopped when the specified number of equivalence points has been found. Range Default value Selection 1 ... 9 9 off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4.6 5 Method MET Ipol - Potentiometric evaluation Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters for the potentiometric evaluation of the titration curve with automatic equivalence point recognition are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrino Selection Default value all | greatest | last | off all Titrando, 855 Selection Default value all | greatest | last | ascending | descending | off all all All equivalence points will be recognized. greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation with volume window (mL) [New] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.4.10, page 621). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.4.10, page 621). [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.4.7 MET Ipol - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found. As this is a relative value related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4.8 5 Method MET Ipol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.4.9 MET Ipol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP criterion mV Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Range Default value 1 ... 999 30 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5 5 Method Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL MET Upol 5.6.3.3.5.1 MET Upol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ MET Upol - 'Command name' Command for Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations with amperometric measurement (selectable polarization voltage). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MET Upol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 624 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the break point × (1… 9) .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 626 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command MET Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -1250 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Messwertdrift Der Messwert wird erst übernommen, wenn die Messwertdrift den hier eingegebenen Wert unterschreitet. Bereich Auswahl Standardwert 0.01 ... 99.90 µA/min aus aus aus Die Messwerte werden erst nach der maximalen Wartezeit übernommen.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 99 µA/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible. This could however also lead to an increase in noise, which could result in unwanted EPs. optimal Parameter set for all standard titrations; optimized for the most frequent applications.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 (slow, optimal, fast) ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands as the measured value alterations between two measuring points are then of the same order of magnitude as the noise. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0001 ... 9.9999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Titrino Range Default value 0.001 ... 9.999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5.5 5 Method MET Upol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.3.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve. Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) With this option set, up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5.7 5 Method MET Upol - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.0 µA/mL Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.10.4, page 878). Initial volume Volume which is present in the measuring vessel before the command is started. Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.99 mL 50.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3.5.9 MET Upol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window# Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.5.10 MET Upol - Volume window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with volume window ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Volume window # Volume windows are defined sub-regions (windows) on the volume axis for which different parameters for the potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.5.11 MET Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method or after a waiting period. The volume that has been added when the endpoint is reached gives the calculable reagent consumption. Reagent addition takes place in three phases during the titration: ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Initial dosing During this phase the dosing rate increases continuously. It starts with the Min. rate and increases to the Max. rate. Continuous dosing In this phase addition is carried out at the Max. rate until the Control range is reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note This command is used for rapid routine determinations when the endpoint does not change throughout a series or when an excess of reagent must be avoided. Commands Depending on the measured value one of the following four SET commands can be selected: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.3.4.2 SET pH Potentiometric pH measurement with pH electrodes (measured quantity pH). SET U Potentiometric voltage measurement with metal electrodes (measured quantity voltage U).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.3 5 Method SET pH 5.6.3.4.3.1 SET pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ SET pH - 'Command name' Command for Set Endpoint Titrations with potentiometric pH measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SET pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 652 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.2 Identification Description .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands of the working life, the validity of the titer and the GLP test interval for the selected solution. Input Selection Default value 24 characters 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.4 SET pH - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 at pH Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -20.00 ... 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics pH Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.5 SET pH - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.3.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET pH - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.3.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 671). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 671). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.9 SET pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.3.10 SET pH - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET U are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .CBY Command status; 1 = Conditioning activated, 0 = Conditioning deactivated .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 674 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.4 5 Method SET U - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 with Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been turned off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.5 5 Method SET U - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the running of the titration are defined on this tab. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.4.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.4.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.4.10, page 692). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.4.10, page 692). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.9 5 Method SET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.4.10 SET U - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET Ipol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 694 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.2 Identification Description .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.4 SET Ipol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 with Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.5 SET Ipol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.5.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.5.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.5.10, page 713). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.5.10, page 713). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.9 SET Ipol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.5.10 SET Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET Upol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 716 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.2 5 Method Identification Description .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.3 5 Method SET Upol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Pause 1 Pause 1 Waiting time, e.g. until the electrode has settled down, before a start volume is added. Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.4.6.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s SET Upol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been turned off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching endpoint 2 on/off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored. Selection Default value + | - | auto auto + positive measured value alteration negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 5.6.3.4.6.6 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET Upol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.7 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum SET Upol - Conditioning Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Conditioning Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditioning on | off (Default value: off) Switching conditioning on/off. If conditioning is deactivated all following parameters are not visible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off No drift correction takes place. Drift value Drift value for drift correction. This parameter is only shown for Drift correction = manual. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99.9 µL/min 0.0 µL/min Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration. The stop volume should be adapted to the size of the titration cell in order to prevent any overflow. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection Default value 0.000000 ... 9999.99 mL 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command. Note Conditioning must already be completed (= Condok) at the time the SEND command is received, otherwise the command to start the titration will be ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.6.10, page 734). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.6.10, page 734). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.9 5 Method SET Upol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.6.10 SET Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Reagent addition takes place in three phases during the titration: ￭ ￭ ￭ Initial dosing During this phase the dosing rate increases continuously. It starts with the Min. rate and increases to the Max. rate. Continuous dosing In this phase, addition is carried out at the Max. rate until the Control range is reached. Dynamics Dosing is finely controlled in this range. Shortly before the endpoint is reached. addition is carried out only at the Min. rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ 5.6.3.5.2 5.6.3.5.2.1 KFT Upol Amperometric measurement with selectable polarization voltage (measured value current I). KFT Ipol KFT Ipol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ KFT Ipol - 'Command name' Command for Karl Fischer Titrations with voltametric measurement (selectable polarization current). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ 5 Method Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command KFT Ipol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 738 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.5.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando (without 852) Selection 1|2 Default value 1 852 Selection Default value 2 2 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method the command. This parameter is displayed only for 751, 758, 784, 795 and 799. 5.6.3.5.2.3 KFT Ipol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrandos. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Pause 1 Pause 1 Waiting time, e.g. until the electrode has settled down, before a start volume is added. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be dosed with the indicated dosing rate before the start of the titration .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.5.2.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s KFT Ipol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Endpoint Ep with Measured value for the endpoint.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics The control range defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and thus also on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Minimum rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.1 ... 9.9 µL/min minimum (slow), minimum (optimal), 5.0 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Titrino Selection Default value drift | time drift Titrando Selection Default value drift | rel.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Relative stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached. The stop drift is the sum of the drift at the titration start and the relative stop drift defined here. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = rel. drift. Titrando Range Default value 1 ... 999 µL/min 10 µL/min Delay time If the endpoint has been reached, the delay time defined here is awaited after the last dosing and then the titration is stopped.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method + positive measured value alteration negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint. Extraction time The titration is not stopped until the extraction time has elapsed (even when the EP has already been reached). The entry of an extraction time may be advisable, e.g. for the titration of sparingly soluble samples. Range 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.2.6 KFT Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Selection Default value 5.6.3.5.2.7 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum KFT Ipol - Conditioning Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Conditioning Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditioning Conditioning on | off (Default value: off) Switching conditioning on/off. If conditioning is deactivated all following parameters are not visible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Drift value Drift value for drift correction. This parameter is only shown for Drift correction = manual. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99.9 µL/min 0.0 µL/min Stop volume Determination stops when the specified volume has been dosed since the start of the conditioning. The stop volume should be adjusted to the size of the titration cell in order to prevent any overflow. Titrando Range Default value Selection Default value 0.000000 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note Conditioning must already be completed (= Condok) at the time the SEND command is received, otherwise the command to start the titration will be ignored. Show measured value during conditioning on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the measured value will be shown in the subwindow Live display of the program part Workplace, in addition to the drift and the time. 5.6.3.5.2.8 KFT Ipol - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.2.10 KFT Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Volume Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command KFT Upol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 758 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .DTI Time for drift correction (time from the start of the titration to the end of the command) in s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .EP.MEA Measured value for the endpoint in the unit of the measured value .EP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.3.2 KFT Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 99.90 µA/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for Control are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Max. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out outside of the Control range. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando Range Default value Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 1.00 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) mL/min 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min 1.00 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) mL/min Min.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands time The endpoint must be exceeded for a certain time: the Delay time. The same Delay time with different, very small volume increments (depending on the volume of the exchange or dosing unit) means different switchoff points. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been switched off. Stop drift Titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop time The titration is stopped if the absolute stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range 5.6.3.5.3.5 1 ... 999999 s KFT Upol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the running of the titration are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.5.3.6 Titrando Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s KFT Upol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop time Titrando Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off off Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Filling rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.5.3.7 Titrando Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Range Default value 1 ... 999 µg/min 20 µg/min Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stabilizing time Waiting period until the start of the titration during which the condition requirement must be continuously fulfilled. Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (Measured value, Volume or Time) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 5.6.3.5.3.9 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6 5.6.3.6.1 5 Method KFC KFC - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties.. ▶ KFC - 'Command name' Command for coulometric Karl Fischer Titrations with voltametric measurement. Note The coulometric water determination is mainly used to determine small amounts of water. Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command KFC and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.QTY Measured value (water) for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in µg .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.6.2 Identification Description .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C KFC - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) Polarization current at the indicator electrode.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Cell Generator type Selection of the generator type. Selection Default value without diaphragm | with diaphragm without diaphragm Generator current Polarization current at the generator electrode.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 851, 852 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. 851, 852 Range Default value -15 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands End point EP at Measured value for the endpoint. 756, 831 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 50.0 mV 851, 852 Range Default value -1250.0 ... 1250.0 mV 50.0 mV Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for Control are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dynamics The control range is entered as distance to the endpoint. Within the control range, iodine will be generated in steps which are controlled by the minimum rate. The larger the control range, the slower the titration. Outside the control range, iodine will be generated continuously with Maximum rate. The standard control parameters are optimal for most applications and should not be modified.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Ipol 10 µA 20 µA 30 µA EP 50 mV 100 mV 150 mV Dynamics 70 mV 100 mV 120 mV Max. rate Maximum rate with which iodine is generated outside the Control range. Range Default value Selection 1.5 ... 2240.0 µg/min 1000.0 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) µg/min maximum Min. rate This parameter defines the minimum rate with which iodine is generated inside the Control range. The smaller the rate the slower the titration and the higher the accuracy.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 1 ... 999 µg/min 5 µg/min Relative stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached. The stop drift is the sum of the drift at the titration start and the relative stop drift defined here. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = rel. drift. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.6.6 756, 831 Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 2s 851, 852 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s KFC - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The conditions for stopping the titration are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Run subwindow displayed on the Single determination or Determination series tab will then switch to COND READY. Range Default value 1 ... 999 µg/min 20 µg/min Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Automatic start after sample addition on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the titration starts automatically when the command is in status COND OK and the Threshold value set is exceeded. In this case the system assumes that the sample has been injected. This parameter is displayed only for 851 and 852.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6.8 5 Method KFC - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6.10 5 Method KFC - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Water Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.7 5.6.3.7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command BRC are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, indicator and generator electrode and stirrers. Start conditions Entry of a waiting period before the start of the titration. Control parameters Control parameters for the endpoint (measured value for the endpoint, titration rate, user-defined parameters, stop criterion).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in mV .EP.CHA Load for endpoint in mA·s .EP.DVT Drift for the endpoint in µg/min .EP.MEA Measured value for the endpoint in mV .EP.QTY Measured value (water) for the endpoint in µg .EP.TEM Temperature for the endpoint 1 in °C .EP.TIM Time in s until the endpoint is reached .EP.TIM Time in s until the endpoint is reached .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.7.2 Identification Description .LP.IGE Current pulsed current for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mA .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mV .LP.QTY Measured value (water) for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in µg .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead. If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command. 5.6.3.7.3 BRC - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ BRC ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 15 s Pause Pause Waiting time before the start of the titration. Range Default value 5.6.3.7.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s BRC - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ BRC ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method optimal Parameter set for all standard titrations; optimized for the most frequent applications. fast For less critical, fast titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics The control range is entered as distance to the endpoint.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value Selection 1.0 ... 999.0 µg/min 15.0 (slow), 25.0 (optimal), 50.0 (fast) µg/min minimum Stop criterion Stop criterion Switches off titration when the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been met. Selection Default value drift | rel. drift | time | drift & time | off drift & time Stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Extraction time The titration is not stopped until the extraction time has elapsed (even when the EP has already been reached). The entry of an extraction time may be advisable, e.g. for the titration of sparingly soluble samples. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Conditioning on | off (Default value: on) Enable/Disable the conditioning. If the conditioning is disabled, the following parameters are not visible. Start drift The determination can only be started when the currently measured drift is less than the start drift entered here. In such cases, the Status in the Run subwindow displayed on the Single determination or Determination series tab will then switch to COND READY. Range Default value 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stabilizing time Waiting period until the start of the titration during which the condition requirement must be continuously fulfilled. Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or bromine) for the fixed endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.1, page 879). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.1, page 879). [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.8 5.6.3.8.1 Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Bromine Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 µg STAT STAT - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Command for STAT Titrations (STAT). Principle In STAT titrations, reagent is added until a preset measured value (control point) has been reached, which is then maintained at a constant level.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Commands Depending on the measured value, one of the following twoSTAT commands can be chosen: ￭ ￭ 5.6.3.8.2 STAT pH STAT titration with pH electrodes (measured quantity pH) STAT U STAT Titration with metal electrodes (measured quantity U). STAT - Control range Tab: Method ▶ STAT ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Set a large control range for steep curves and a small control range for flat ones.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.3 STAT - Evaluation window Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations ▶ Rate evaluation ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Evaluation window # Evaluation windows are defined time segments in which the dosing rate is determined by linear regression. Lower limit Lower limit of evaluation window. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99999.9 s 0.0 s Upper limit Upper limit of evaluation window. Range Default value 5.6.3.8.4 0.0 ... 999999.9 s 999999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Limit exceeding Selects the exceeded limit for which a track is to be started. Selection Default value Lower limit | Upper limit | Any | OK Any Any The track will be started if either the upper or the lower limit is exceeded. OK The track is started when the monitored quantities are once again within the limit values (including hysteresis). Track name Selects the track that is to be started automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Cylinder volume 5.6.3.8.6 5.6.3.8.6.1 Max. dosing rate Max. flow rate Exchange unit Dosing unit Exchange unit Dosing unit 1 mL 2.25 mL/min --- approx. 130 mL/h --- 2 mL --- 5.00 mL/min --- approx. 300 mL/h 5 mL 11.25 mL/min 12.50 mL/min approx. 670 mL/h approx. 750 mL/h 10 mL10 mL 22.50 mL/min 25.00 mL/min approx. 1.3 L/h approx. 1.5 L/h 20 mL 45.00 mL/min 50.00 mL/min approx. 2.7 L/h approx. 3.0 L/h 50 mL 112.50 mL/min 124.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5 Method General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Control parameters Parameters for the control point. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration. Stop conditions Definitions of conditions which cause the stop of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 814 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MR.MRC Correlation coefficient for mean dosing rate for the whole range .MR.MRS Standard deviation for mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min .MR.MRT Mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min. .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.6.2 STAT pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method run to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titration rate Titration rate Three predefined rates, for which the parameters for Control are not displayed, can selected for the titration rate. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value 50 µL/min | 100 µL/min | 500 µL/min | User 100 µL/min Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min Min. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out at the very beginning of the titration and in the Control range at the end of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored. Selection Default value + | - | auto auto + positive measured value alteration negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start time The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this time has elapsed since the start of the titration. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Start measured value pH The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this value has been reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -20,000 ... 20,000 off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -20.00 ... 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 100,000 mL off Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.000 ... 9999.99 mL 100.00 mL off Stop time Stops when the preset time has elapsed after the start conditions have been fulfilled.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min off off Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.8.6.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20,000 ... 20,000 -20,000 Titrino Range Default value -20.00 ... 20.00 -20.00 Lower hysteresis pH Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.000 ... 20,000 0.020 Upper limit pH Upper limit of the measured value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop determination The running STAT command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped. Stop command (only Titrando) The running STAT command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted and a message appears.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Upper limit Upper limit of the dosing rate. If the dosing rate exceeds this limit, then the event Dosing rate upper limit exceeded will be triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00 ... 166.00 mL/min 166.00 mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 150.00 mL/min 150.00 mL/min Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the dosing rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note If, when monitoring the dosing rate, the Lower limit is exceeded then the actions Wait for [Continue] and Wait for limit ok are irrelevant as the mean dosing rate becomes ever smaller during this time. The valid range can never be reached again. Monitoring Temperature Monitoring Temperature on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the temperature will be monitored and any exceeded limits will be entered in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature. When the temperature once again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, the action Temperature upper limit ok is triggered Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.4, page 810). [Delete] Deletes the track call selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.6.8 STAT pH - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 671). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 671). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.6.9 STAT pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.6.10 STAT pH - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command STAT U are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Control parameters Parameters for the control point. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 840 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.8.7.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command STAT U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) to be used for the dosing. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 2 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV off off Titration rate Titration rate Three predefined rates, for which the parameters for Control are not displayed, can selected for the titration rate. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value 50 µL/min | 100 µL/min | 500 µL/min | User 100 µL/min Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method point for parameterization: Max. rate in mL/min = 0.005 • Expected rate of reaction in µL/min. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min Min. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out at the very beginning of the titration and in the Control range at the end of the titration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.7.5 STAT U - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 2s Start time The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this time has elapsed since the start of the titration. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Start measured value The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this value has been reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.7.6 STAT U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Last dosing The stop time starts after the last increment has been dosed, i. e. the stop time is reset to zero again after each dosing step. Stop rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min off off Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Monitoring Measured value Monitoring Measured value on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the measured value will be monitored and any exceeded limits will be entered in the measuring point list. Lower limit Lower limit of the measured value. When the measured value falls below this value, the event Measured value lower limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV -2000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 2000.0 mV 0.2 mV Action Selection of the event to be triggered if the upper or lower limit is exceeded: Selection Default value Stop determination | Stop command (Titrando, 855) | Wait for [Continue] | Wait for limit ok | none none Stop determination The running STAT command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 150.00 mL/min 0.00 mL/min Lower hysteresis The lower hysteresis represents a tolerance range for the lower limit of the dosing rate. When the dosing rate exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, the action Dosing rate lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.20 mL/min Upper limit Upper limit of the dosing rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop command (Titrando, 855) The running STAT command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted and a message appears. As soon as the monitored measured value is again within the limits (including hysteresis) reagent dosing can be resumed by pressing the [Continue] button in this message box. Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature. When the temperature once again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, the action Temperature upper limit ok is triggered Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, a maximum of 20 entries can be defined as to which track is to be started automatically when a particular limit value is exceeded. [New] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.4, page 810). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.7.10, page 862).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 5.6.3.8.7.9 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.0 mV/mL STAT U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered. [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.7.10 STAT U - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command TET are configured on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Entry of a waiting period before the start of the titration. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration. Stop conditions Entry of criteria which cause the titration to stop. Thermometric evaluation Parameters for the thermometric evaluation of titration curves.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 864 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description EP{x}.ERC 2. derivative for the endpoint x (1…9) in the unit of the measured value EP{x}.MEA Measured value for the endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value EP{x}.TIM Time for the endpoint x (1...9) in s EP{x}.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.9.2 5 Method Identification Description MA.TIM Time at maximum measured value in s MA.VOL Volume at maximum measured value in mL MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value MI.TIM Time at minimum measured value in s MI.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead. If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Sensor name' | not defined not defined not defined If the sensor is not defined, then it will be checked at the start of the determination whether a sensor of the type Thermoprobe is connected to the measuring input. If this is the case, the connected sensor is used; if it is no the case, an error message appears. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off No stirrer will be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.00000 ... 50.0000 mL 0 mL Dosing rate Rate (volume/time unit) at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the dosing unit used. Range Selection Default value 0.100 ... 166.000 mL/min maximum maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the dosing of a start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 1 ... 200 50 Damping until Range from the start of the measurement in which the curve is additionally damped. This parameter allows to minimize the influence of titration artifacts (e.g. spikes), which occur at the beginning of the measurement and can mistakenly be interpreted as endpoints. The damping functions as a linear ramp, i.e. its influence is the highest at the beginning and then decreases linearly to the defined volume. Range Default value 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Stop slope Stops when the criterion defined for the first derivative of the measured value (slope) is fulfilled. First field: Selection of the reference condition. Selection Default value <|> < Second field: Definition of reference value for the derivative of the measured value. Range Default value Selection -999999.999 ... 999999.999 °C/mL (Increment: 0.001) 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation start Possibility to postpone the start of the evaluation. The evaluation starts not before having added the solution volume. Range Default value 0.0 ... 50.0 mL 0.1 mL Endpoints Selection of the sorting for the display of the endpoints in the table. Selection Default value Sort by volume (ascending) | Sort by peak height (descending) Sort by volume (ascending) Table of endpoints A maximum of 9 endpoints can be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.9.10, page 874). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fixed endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.9.10, page 874). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.9.8 5 Method TET - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ TET ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.9.9 TET - Endpoint Dialog window: Method ▶ TET ▶ Properties... ▶ Thermometric evaluation ▶ [New]/ [Properties] ▶ Endpoint Reaction type Selection of the reaction type according to which the curve is to be evaluated.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.10 5 Method Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL Evaluation 5.6.3.10.1 pK value and Half neutralization potential Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ pK/HNP evaluation The pK value can be determined for pH titrations (DET and MET) and the half neutralization potential can be determined for U titrations.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note If a start volume is to be added then it must be smaller than 1/2 V(EP1). 5.6.3.10.2 Minimum/Maximum evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/MEAS ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Minimum/Maximum evaluation For the minimum or maximum measured value the associated volume, time and temperature are interpolated from the measuring point list. The evaluation begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds a particular threshold value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.10.3 5 Method Break-point evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET/MEAS ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Break-point evaluation A break-point evaluation is used to determine sharp change of direction in the titration curve. This evaluation is primarily used for photometric and conductivity titrations. The method is based on the search for extremes in the second derivative of the curve. tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.10.4 Gran evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Gran evaluation The Gran evaluation can be used to determine S-shaped DET and MET titration curves. Two different procedures can be selected for this which are referred to as Normalized and Standard. In the normalized procedure, the titration curves are linearized in 2 parts: the first part is before, the second after the equivalence point.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.11 5 Method Additional measured values 5.6.3.11.1 Calculated measured value Dialog window: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/STAT/MEAS/DOS ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value empty | ppm | % | g/L | mg/L | mg/mL | mg/ 100g | mol/L | mmol/L | mL | g | mg | µg | °C | µL | s | mS/cm empty Decimal places Number of decimal places with which the calculated measured value will be displayed. Range Default value 0 ... 5 2 Comment Comment on the calculated measured value. Input Default value 5.6.3.11.2 250 characters 'empty' External measured value Dialog window: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/STAT/MEAS/DOS ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4 5.6.4.1 5 Method Measuring commands Measuring commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New command... ▶ Measure Commands for measurements with different measured quantities. The following measuring commands can be selected: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) MEAS pH Potentiometric pH measurement with pH electrodes. MEAS U Potentiometric voltage measurement with metal electrodes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.2 Standard addition - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New command... ▶ Measure Principle With the standard addition procedure an known amount of the substance to determine is once or more than once added to the sample, whereby the addition can be carried out manually or automatically. In contrast to the normal ion measurement with ion-selective electrodes (see Chapter 5.6.5.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Caution The values for the axis intercept E(0), the slope s and the concentration cA can only be iteratively recalculated out of voltages Ui measured for the sample and the spiked solutions and the known concentration of the standard which requires a lot of effort because it is about an equation system with 3 unknowns. At least, the concentration cS is easily recalculable with the values for E(0), US and s calculated by tiamo (see following example).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.4.3 5.6.4.3.1 STDADD man Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution. STDADD dos Standard addition with addition of the standard addition solution from a dosing device. STDADD auto Standard addition with automatic addition of the standard addition solution from a dosing device in such a way that a constant potential difference results. MEAS pH MEAS pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MEAS pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .BP{x}.MEA Measured value for the break point x (1...9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{x}.TEM Temperature for the break point x (1…9) in °C .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point x (1…9) in s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.3.2 Identification Description .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855, 867 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.3.3 5 Method MEAS pH - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement The two measuring modes Measurement with drift control or Measurement without drift control can be selected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Titrino Range Default value 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop measured value pH Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 off off off No stop. Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off No stop. Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. 5.6.4.3.4 Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.4.3.6, page 896). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands measured value can be evaluated as a break point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer break-points will be found. Range Default value 2 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.3.5 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined here which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS U are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 898 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint x (1...9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint x (1...9) is reached .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 867 Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement without drift control The measurement is carried out without drift control if this option is enabled. The measurement continues until one of the stop criterions Measuring time or Stop measured value is met. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled. Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.4.4 5 Method MEAS U - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/s 25.0 mV/s Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/s 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value -2000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.4.6 5 Method MEAS U - Fix endpoint evaluation # Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Ipol are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value x (1…3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value x (1…3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.0 µA (Increment: 0.5) 5.0 µA Titrino Range Default value -127 ... 125.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 855 and 867. 5.6.4.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time. The response time of an electrode can also increase with time, i.e. reaching a constant measured value takes longer and longer. Drift-controlled measurement is particularly advisable in such cases, as the measured values are not applied until equilibrium has almost been achieved.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off off No stop.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab. Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fix measured quantity (Measured value or Time) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/s 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value -2000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.5.6 MEAS Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation # Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | time Measured value Fix value Value of the fixed endpoint. Measured value (Titrando, 867, 855) Range -2000.0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Upol are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.6.2 Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands U(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 855 and 867. 5.6.4.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time. The response time of an electrode can also increase with time, i.e. reaching a constant measured value takes longer and longer. Drift-controlled measurement is particularly advisable in such cases, as the measured values are not applied until equilibrium has almost been achieved.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -200.0 ... 200.0 µA off off off No stop.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab. Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fix measured quantity (Measured value or Time) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/s 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -200.0 ... 200.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.6.6 5 Method MEAS Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation # Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.4.7 5.6.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS T are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.7.2 MEAS T - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Temperature sensor or pH Electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. Selection Default value Sensor name | Temperature sensor | pH Electrode Temperature sensor Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855, 856, 867 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off Default value 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement The two measuring modes Measurement with drift control or Measurement without drift control can be selected. Selection Default value Measurement with drift control | Measurement without drift control Measurement with drift control Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off No stop. Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 600 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 600 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. 5.6.4.7.4 Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.0 °C MEAS T - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 °C/s 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method measured value can be evaluated as a break point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.7.5 1 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS T - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined here which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS T/Flow are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluation Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.8.2 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.GFL Gas flow value for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in mL/min .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The general parameters for the device are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop measured value Temp. Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. off means no stop. Range Selection Default value 5.6.4.8.4 50.0 ... 250.0 °C off off MEAS T/Flow - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T/Flow ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.8.5 MEAS T/Flow - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T/Flow ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.9 5.6.4.9.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MEAS Conc and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 954 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BLV Blank value of the sensor used for the command (only for ISE sensors) .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.9.2 5 Method Identification Description .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS Conc - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Conc ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 867 Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of an ISE sensor from the ISE sensors available in the sensor table. Selection Default value 'Sensor name' | ISE electrode ISE electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.4.9.3 MEAS Conc - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Conc ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement with drift control If the option Measurement with drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the signal drift defined here has been fallen short of. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Max. number of entries? Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.10 5 Method MEAS Cond 5.6.4.10.1 MEAS Cond - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ MEAS Cond - 'Command name' Command for Conductivity measurements.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 962 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .CLC Cell constant of the sensor used in the command for conductivity measurement cells .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.10.2 5 Method Identification Description .MI.MEA Minimum measured value (Uind) in mV .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .RTE Reference temperature in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .TC.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display of the device type. Selection Default value 712 Conductometer | 856 Conductivity Module 856 Conductivity Module Sensor Sensor Selection of a sensor of the Conductivity sensor type from the sensors configured in the sensor table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.4.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled. The measurement is stopped as soon as the defined Signal drift or the Stop measured value is reached or a waiting time has elapsed. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled. This option is not available for the 712 Conductometer.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 856 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. 856 Range Selection Default value 0.0000 ... 2000.00 mS/cm off off off No stop.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Range Selection Default value 0.0000 ... 2000.00 mS/cm off off off No stop. Temperature Measurement temperature Temperature of the solution to be measured. If a temperature sensor is connected, the temperature entered here is ignored. 712 Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0°C 20.0 856 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0°C 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sample solution Selection of a function for the temperature coefficients from the table Sample solutions (TC conductivity). Temperature coefficient Range Default value 0.00 ... 9.99 %/°C 2.00 %/°C Sample solution Selection of the sample solution from the table Sample solutions (TC conductivity). Selection Default value 5.6.4.10.4 DIN | Table entries DIN MEAS Cond - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.001 ... 10.0 (mS/cm)/s 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.10.5 1 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS Cond - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ Commands ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.EX1…3'[New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS TC Cond are configured on the following two tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fix endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fix endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fix endpoint × (1…9) is reached .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.11.2 Identification Description .TC.C1 Coefficient c1 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.C2 Coefficient c2 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.C3 Coefficient c3 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.C4 Coefficient c4 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.MAX Maximum temperature coefficient in %/°C ( .TC.MIN Minimum temperature coefficient in %/°C ( .TC.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Sensor Selection of a sensor of the Conductivity sensor type from the sensors configured in the sensor table. Selection Default value Sensor name | Conductivity sensor Conductivity sensor Stirrer This section is visible only if the 856 Conductivity Module was selected as device type. Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement frequency 712 Selection Default value auto | 300 Hz | 2.4 kHz auto auto The more suitable of the two frequencies is selected. Stop time Maximum period of time for measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 3000 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 712 Range Default value 0.4 ... 999999 s 2.0 s 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.11.4 5 Method MEAS TC Cond - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.2, page 880). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.12 5.6.4.12.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.12.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.12.3 MEAS Ref - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Ref ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Start wavelength Lower limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 400.0 nm End wavelength Upper limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 1000.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.13 5 Method MEAS Spec 5.6.4.13.1 MEAS Spec - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ MEAS Spec - 'Command name' Command for the Measurement of the sample spectrum. Devices This command can be executed with the following device: Spectrometer: Avantes Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Spec are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.13.2 Identification Description .PK{#}.ABS Absorbance of the peak with the greatest absorbance (maximum absorbance) for evaluation # (1…9) .PK{#}.TRN Transmission of the peak with the greatest absorbance (minimum transmission) for evaluation # (1…9) in % .PK{#}.CNT Intensity of the peak with the greatest absorbance (maximum intensity) for evaluation # (1…9) .PK{#}.CNR Intensity in reference spectrum 'Command name'.PK{#}.WVL for evaluation # (1…9) .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value 5.6.4.13.3 Avantes Spectrometer Avantes Spectrometer MEAS Spec - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.13.4 MEAS Spec - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab. [New] Opens the dialog window Evaluation window # for entering the start and end wavelengths (see Chapter 5.6.4.13.5, page 986).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Opt are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Definition of evaluation results for absorbance measurements.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 988 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FP{#}.CNT Intensity for the fix endpoint x (1…9) in counts .FP{#}.TEM Temperature for the fix endpoint # (1…9) in °C .FP{#}.TIM Time for fix endpoint # (1…9) in s .FP{#}.TRN Transmission for the fix endpoint x (1…9) in % .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.14.2 5 Method Identification Description .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS Opt - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Opt ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Wavelength Wavelength at which the measured quantity (absorbance) is recorded Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 400.0 nm Integration time Integration time for absorption measurement. Range Default value 0.01 ... 600000 ms 6 ms Averaged spectra The number of spectra that are recorded and averaged. Range Default value 1 ... 10000 10 Smoothing Number of neighboring pixels with which the light intensity is determined for each measurement pixel.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.14.4 5 Method MEAS Opt - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Opt ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.1 ... 1000.0 mAU/s 20.0 mAU/s Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 1000.0 mAU/s 20.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.15 5.6.4.15.1 Measured value Range 0 ... 4000 mAU Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s STDADD man STDADD man - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ STDADD man - 'Command name' Command for Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command STDADD man and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.15.2 STDADD man - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined here. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Selection of a sensor of type ISE electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. Selection Default value 'Sensor name' | ISE electrode ISE electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.15.3 STDADD man - Standard addition Tab: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ Standard addition Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the standard addition can be defined on this tab Number of additions Number of times the standard solution is to be added. Range Default value 1 ... 19 3 Volume auxiliary solution Volume of the auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) which was added to the sample before the first standard addition.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Addition solution Concentration Concentration of addition solution. Range Default value 0.001 ... 999999.999 1.000 Device Concentration unit of addition solution. Selection Default value 5.6.4.15.4 mol/L | mmol/L | µmol/L | ppm | g/L | mg/L | µg/L | mg/mL | µg/mL | % | mEq/L ppm STDADD man - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.16 5 Method STDADD dos 5.6.4.16.1 STDADD dos - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ STDADD dos ▶ Properties... ▶ STDADD dos - 'Command name' Command for Standard addition with addition of the standard addition solution from a dosing device.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 1002 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.16.2 5 Method STDADD dos - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STDADD ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Number of additions Number of times the standard solution is added. Range Default value 1 ... 19 3 Volume auxiliary solution Volume of the auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) to be added to the sample before the first standard addition. Range Default value 0 ... 9999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Concentration Concentration of addition solution. Range Default value 0.001 ... 999999.999 1.000 Device Concentration unit of addition solution. Selection Default value mol/L | mmol/L | µmol/L | ppm | g/L | mg/L | µg/L | mg/mL | µg/mL | % | mEq/L ppm Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Selection Default value 5.6.4.16.4 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.17 5 Method STDADD auto 5.6.4.17.1 STDADD auto - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ STDADD auto ▶ Properties... ▶ STDADD auto - 'Command name' Command for Standard addition with automatic addition of the standard addition solution from a dosing device in such a way that a constant potential difference results.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 1010 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.17.2 5 Method STDADD auto - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STDADD auto ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Number of additions Number of times the standard solution is added. Range Default value 1 ... 19 3 Volume auxiliary solution Volume of the auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) which was added to the sample before the first standard addition. Range Default value 0.0000 ... 9999.999 mL 0.0000 mL Stop volume Volume of auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) that is to be added to the sample before the first standard addition. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9999.9 mL 100.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Delta U Potential difference that is to be achieved by a standard addition. Range Default value 5.6.4.17.4 1 ... 999 mV 10 mV STDADD auto - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ STDADD ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150°C 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The basic structure of a calibration method looks as follows: The calibration can be carried out with both manual and automatic solution changes with the aid of a Sample Processor. Commands The following commands can be selected for calibration: ￭ ￭ ￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) CALL LOOP pH Calibration loop for the calibration of pH electrodes. 5.6.5.5CAL MEAS pH Measurement of buffers for the calibration of pH electrodes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.5.2 CAL MEAS Conc Measurement of standards for the calibration of ion-selective electrodes (ISE electrodes). CAL Cond Measurement of conductivity standards for the determination of the cell constant of conductivity measurement cells. CAL Spec Measuring command for wavelength calibration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method method run, a request for specifying the next the buffer or standard is displayed after each measurement. 5.6.5.3 Calibrating with manual solution changing Program part: Method ▶ Calibration commands The basic structure of a calibration method with automatic solution exchange on a Sample Processor looks as follows: * Definition of the number of calibration solutions and the type of solution exchange. ** Move to the next calibration solution. tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The request for changing the buffer or standard must be deactivated in the command CAL LOOP pH or CAL LOOP Conc, respectively. No request for changing the buffer or standard is then displayed during the run. For the automatic move to the next calibration solution on the Sample Processor, a MOVE command must be inserted between the loop command CAL LOOP and the measuring command CAL MEAS. The positions of the calibration solutions on the rack are defined in this command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The formula editor is opened with a right click in the input field. 5.6.5.4 5.6.5.4.1 CAL LOOP pH CAL LOOP pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP pH ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name' Loop command for the calibration of pH electrodes which is used together with the command CAL MEAS pH.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.4.2 Identification Description .SLO Electrode slope calculated from the calibration CAL LOOP pH - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP pH ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name' The number of buffers and the buffer type are defined in the dialog window CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name'. Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Buffers Number of buffers Selecting the number of buffers for the pH calibration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The automatic buffer recognition is deactivated for the buffer type Special and the buffers must therefore be measured at the time of calibration in the same order as they were defined in the command CAL LOOP pH. Buffer # pH pH value of the special buffers (this parameter is only displayed for Buffer type = Special). -20.000 ... 20.000 Range Note Enter the pH values for the measuring temperature used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Met4 Met7 Met9 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 10 3.99 7.06 9.13 15 3.99 7.04 9.08 20 3.99 7.02 9.04 25 4.00 7.00 9.00 30 4.00 6.99 8.96 35 4.01 6.98 8.93 40 4.02 6.98 8.90 45 4.03 6.97 8.87 50 4.04 6.97 8.84 55 4.06 6.97 8.81 60 4.07 6.97 8.79 65 4.09 6.98 8.76 70 4.11 6.98 8.74 75 4.13 6.99 8.73 80 4.15 7.00 8.71 85 4.18 7.00 8.70 90 4.20 7.01 8.68 95 4.23 7.02 8.67 NIST Temp.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) NIST1 NIST4 NIST7 NIST9 NIST13 pH 1 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 13 35 1.691 4.025 6.843 9.107 12.133 40 1.697 4.036 6.837 9.076 11.984 45 1.704 4.049 6.834 9.046 11.841 50 1.712 4.064 6.833 9.018 11.705 55 1.715 4.075 6.834 8.985 11.574 60 1.723 4.091 6.836 8.962 11.449 65 1.732 4.108 6.840 8.941 - 70 1.743 4.126 6.845 8.921 - 75 1.754 4.145 6.852 8.902 - 80 1.766 4.164 6.859 8.885 - 85 1.778 4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) DIN1 DIN3 DIN4 DIN7 DIN9 DIN12 pH 1 pH 3 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 12 60 1.11 3.04 4.70 6.76 8.92 11.69 65 1.11 3.04 4.71 6.76 8.90 11.56 70 1.11 3.04 4.72 6.76 8.88 11.43 75 1.12 3.04 4.74 6.77 8.86 11.30 80 1.12 3.05 4.75 6.78 8.85 11.19 85 1.12 3.06 4.77 6.79 8.83 11.08 90 1.13 3.07 4.79 6.80 8.82 10.99 95 - - - - - - Fis2 Fis4 Fis7 Fis10 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 0 - 4.01 7.13 10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Fis2 Fis4 Fis7 Fis10 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 85 - 4.18 7.06 9.61 90 - 4.21 7.08 9.60 95 - 4.23 7.11 9.60 FBS4 FBS7 FBS9 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 0 4.01 7.11 9.20 5 4.00 7.08 9.15 10 4.00 7.05 9.10 15 4.00 7.02 9.05 20 4.00 7.00 9.00 25 4.01 6.98 8.96 30 4.01 6.97 8.91 35 4.02 6.96 8.88 40 4.03 6.95 8.84 45 4.04 6.94 8.80 50 4.06 6.94 8.77 55 4.07 6.93 8.74 60 4.09 6.93 8.71 65 4.11 6.93 8.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Mettler-Toledo Temp. (°C) MT2 MT4 MT7 MT9 MT11 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 11 0 2.03 4.01 7.12 9.52 11.90 5 2.02 4.01 7.09 9.45 11.72 10 2.01 4.00 7.06 9.38 11.54 15 2.00 4.00 7.04 9.32 11.36 20 2.00 4.00 7.02 9.26 11.18 25 2.00 4.01 7.00 9.21 11.00 30 1.99 4.01 6.99 9.16 10.82 35 1.99 4.02 6.98 9.11 10.64 40 1.98 4.03 6.97 9.06 10.46 45 1.98 4.04 6.97 9.03 10.28 50 1.98 4.06 6.97 8.99 10.10 55 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Mer2 Mer4 Mer7 Mer9 Mer12 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 12 20 2.00 4.00 7.00 9.00 12.00 25 2.00 4.01 6.98 8.95 11.88 30 2.00 4.01 6.98 8.91 11.72 35 2.00 4.01 6.96 8.88 11.67 40 2.00 4.01 6.95 8.85 11.54 45 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.82 11.44 50 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.79 11.33 55 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.76 11.19 60 2.00 4.00 6.96 8.73 11.04 65 2.00 4.00 6.96 8.715 10.97 70 2.01 4.00 6.96 8.70 10.90 75 2.01 4.00 6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) MerC4.01 MerC7.00 MerC9.00 MerC10.00 pH 4.01 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 pH 10.00 45 4.05 6.97 8.87 9.80 50 4.06 6.97 8.84 9.73 55 - - - - 60 - - - - 65 - - - - 70 - - - - 75 - - - - 80 - - - - 85 - - - - 90 - - - - 95 - - - - Beckmann Temp. (°C) 1030 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Bec4 Bec7 Bec10 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 0 4.00 7.12 10.32 5 4.00 7.09 10.25 10 4.00 7.06 10.18 15 4.00 7.04 10.12 20 4.00 7.02 10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Bec4 Bec7 Bec10 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 70 4.12 6.99 - 75 4.14 7.00 - 80 4.16 7.00 - 85 4.18 7.01 - 90 4.19 7.02 - 95 4.21 7.03 - Radiometer Temp. (°C) tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) Rad4.01 Rad7.00 Rad9.18 pH 4.01 pH 7 pH 9.18 0 4.000 7.118 9.464 5 3.998 7.087 9.395 10 3.997 7.059 9.332 15 3.998 7.036 9.276 20 4.001 7.016 9.225 25 4.005 7.000 9.180 30 4.011 6.987 9.139 35 4.018 6.977 9.102 40 4.027 6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Rad4.01 Rad7.00 Rad9.18 pH 4.01 pH 7 pH 9.18 4.240 - - Bak4 Bak7 Bak9 Bak10 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 pH 10.00 0 4.00 7.13 9.23 10.30 5 4.00 7.09 9.17 10.24 10 4.00 7.05 9.10 10.17 15 4.00 7.03 9.05 10.11 20 4.00 7.00 9.00 10.05 25 4.00 6.98 8.96 10.00 30 4.01 6.98 8.91 9.96 35 4.02 6.98 8.88 9.93 40 4.03 6.97 8.84 9.89 45 4.04 6.97 8.81 9.86 50 4.05 6.96 8.78 9.82 55 4.07 6.96 8.76 9.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Ham4.01 Ham7.00 Ham9.21 Ham10.01 pH 4.01 pH 7.00 pH 9.21 pH10.01 5 4.01 7.09 9.45 10.19 10 4.00 7.06 9.38 10.15 15 4.00 7.04 9.32 10.11 20 4.00 7.02 9.26 10.06 25 4.01 7.00 9.21 10.01 30 4.01 6.99 9.16 9.97 35 4.02 6.98 9.11 9.92 40 4.03 6.97 9.06 9.86 45 4.04 6.97 9.03 9.83 50 4.06 6.97 8.99 9.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) 5.6.5.5 5.6.5.5.1 Pre4 Pre7 Pre9 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 30 4.00 6.99 8.96 35 4.01 6.98 8.93 40 4.02 6.98 8.90 45 4.03 6.97 8.87 50 4.04 6.97 8.84 55 4.06 6.97 8.81 60 4.07 6.97 8.79 65 4.09 6.98 8.76 70 4.11 6.98 8.74 75 4.13 6.99 8.73 80 4.15 7.00 8.71 85 4.18 7.00 8.70 90 4.20 7.01 8.68 95 4.23 7.02 8.67 CAL MEAS pH CAL MEAS pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL MEAS pH ▶ Properties..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command CAL MEAS pH are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command CAL MEAS pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.5.2 Identification Description .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error CAL MEAS pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ CAL MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 867 Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 855 and 867. 5.6.5.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 10 s Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 5.6.5.6 5.6.5.6.1 -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C CAL LOOP Conc CAL LOOP Conc - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP Conc ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name' Loop command for the calibration of ion-selective electrodes, which is used together with the command CAL MEAS Conc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The influence of interfering ions can be described by the Nikolski equation. This is an extended Nernst equation which considers the selectivity of the ISE. For the ISE calibration with tiamo it is used in the following form: U i = E (0) + UN log (ci + cB ) z The Nernst constant UN represents the theoretical slope s of the calibration function, divided by the charge z of the measuring ion. With anions it has a negative sign, with cations a positive one.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ 3 and multiple point calibration With at least 3 calibration solutions the calibration function is determined according to the method of least squares. The sought calibration parameters s, E(0) and cB are calculated iteratively. If the value for cB is lower than aprox. 0.2 % of the lowest concentration, it is set equal to zero. In such a case a linear relation between Ui and log(ci) results.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.6.2 5 Method CAL LOOP Conc - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP Conc ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name' The number of standards and their concentration are defined in the dialog window CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name'. Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Standards Number of standards Selection of the number of standards with which the concentration calibration is to be carried out. Selection Default value 1|2|3|4|5 2 Unit conc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Devices This command can be executed with the following devices: Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 857, 904, 905, 906, 907 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command CAL MEAS Conc are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.7.2 5 Method Identification Description .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this check box is activated, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.5.7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 110 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command CAL Cond are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Conductivity standard Defining the values or the type of the input for calibration with one standard.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.8.2 Identification Description .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .RTE Reference temperature in °C (only MEAS Cond and CAL Cond) .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Sensor Selection of a conductivity sensor from the conductivity sensors available in the sensor table. Selection Default value 'Sensor name' | Conductivity sensor Conductivity sensor Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. 856 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.5.8.3 CAL Cond - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ CAL Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement Measurement frequency 712 Selection Default value auto | 300 Hz | 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time. The response time of an electrode can also increase with time, i.e. reaching a constant measured value takes longer and longer. Drift-controlled measurement is particularly advisable in such cases, as the measured values are not applied until equilibrium has almost been achieved.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Max. number of entries? 712 Range Default value 0.4 ... 999999 s 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Input | Request | Template Input Input If this option is selected, then the values for the conductivity standard can be entered directly. Request If this option is selected, then first the current temperature of the solution is measured after the start of the determination. Afterwards, the dialog window Data Conductivity standard will appear (see Chapter 5.6.5.8.5, page 1056). The method continues running after the data has been entered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Name standard List box with conductivity standards. The data of one of these standards is used to calculate the temperature coefficient for the specified reference temperature. Selection 5.6.5.8.5 'Conductivity standard' CAL Cond - Data Conductivity standard Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL Cond ▶ Data Conductivity standard Current temperature Display of the currently measured temperature of the conductivity standard.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command CAL Cond are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Calibration wavelengths Input of the reference wavelengths. Definition of the behavior of the calibration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.9.2 Identification Description .CP{#}.MEA Measured wavelength of the calibration point in nm. If no measured peak can be assigned, then not found will be entered. .CP{#}.REF Reference wavelength of the calibration point in nm. .FIN Command status: 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0 = Command was started but not ended, invalid = Command was not started (variable not available). .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.9.3 5 Method CAL Spec - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ CAL Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Integration time Integration time for spectrum recording. Range Default value 0.01 ... 600000 ms 6 ms Averaged spectra The number of spectra that are recorded and averaged. Range Default value 5.6.5.9.4 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calibration wavelength # to edit the values selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.5.9.5, page 1060). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.5.9.5 CAL Spec - Calibration wavelength # Tab: Method ▶ CAL Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Calibration wavelengths ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Calibration wavelength # Wavelength Range Default value 5.6.6 5.6.6.1 200.0 ... 1100.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.2 5.6.6.2.1 5 Method ADD ADD - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ ADD ▶ Properties... ▶ ADD - 'Command name' Command for dosing a defined volume of a solution with an exchange or dosing unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.2.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the dosing device to be used for the dosing. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Tandem dosing on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the dosing is carried out without interruption with a combination of two dosing devices so that the second dosing device is dosing while the first one is being filled and vice-versa. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 846, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864 and 874.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 846, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off Default value 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 846, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range -15 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 730, 778, 789 Range Default value 0.001 ... 999.999 mL 10.0000 mL 774 Range Default value 0.01 ... 999.999 mL 10.0000 mL Dosing rate The rate at which the volume is dosed. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered dosing rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Titrando, 846, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range 0.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Note The filling rate should be reduced for viscous liquids. Fill automatically at start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the buret is filled automatically before dosing. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 846, 855, 856, 864, 867, 814, 815 and 874.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ent dosing types can be selected for the dosing. Two of the three parameters Volume, Dosing rate and Dosing time can be specified. The third parameter is calculated according to the following formula: Volume = Dosing time • Dosing rate If continuous dosing is required, a tandem dosing setup can be used, i.e. dosing is carried out with a combination of two dosing devices. The second dosing device is dosing while the first one is being filled and vice-versa.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Specification of volume and dosing time You define the volume and the time in which this volume is to be dosed (particularly suitable for synthesis applications). The dosing rate is automatically optimized. The time defined as Dosing time corresponds to the net dosing time t1+t2, i.e. the filling time of the exchange or dosing unit is included in the total.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note This formula applies only for using a single dosing device. The dosing rate is equal to the flow rate in the case of tandem dosing. If the required dosing rate exceeds the maximum dosing rate for the selected exchange or dosing unit (or cylinder volume, respectively), then a larger cylinder volume must be selected. Specification of dosing rate and dosing time You define the dosing rate with which dosing is to be carried out during a particular time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Filling times Filling times are not included in the calculation of the dosing rate. The filling times (including valve switching) can be estimated according to the following formula: Filling time in s = (max. filling rate/current filling rate) • t + 4 s t = 20 s (for exchange units) or 18 s (for dosing units) The maximum filling rate is dependent on the cylinder volume of the exchange/dosing unit that has been put into use.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing rate in mL/min = dosing volume/(total duration - number of refillings • filling time • 1/60) 5.6.6.3.3 DOS - Track call Dialog window: Method ▶ DOS pH/DOS U ▶ Monitoring ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Track call # Monitoring Selects the quantity at which a track is to be started when its limit value is exceeded. Selection Default value Measured value | Temperature | Any Measured value Any Either one of the two sizes.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando: 835, 836, 842, 857, 902, 906, 907 Titrino: 718, 736, 751, 799 pH/Ion Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command DOS pH are configured in the following 5 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Dosing parameters Parameters for the dosing settings.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 1074 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .EME Final measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode zero point of the sensor used for the command (dimensionless) .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.3.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in %) .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command .VOL Dosed volume DOS pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DOS pH ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the dosing device to be used for the dosing. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Selection of the second dosing device (exchange or dosing unit) to be used for the dosing if the first dosing device is not available. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 2 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing rate Rate at which dosing should take place. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered dosing rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. This parameter is only displayed for Dosing criterion = Volume/Dosing rate or Dosing rate/Dosing time. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.6.3.4.4 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 5.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 5s DOS pH - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DOS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop time Stops when the preset time has elapsed since the start of the dosing. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off off Means that no stop will take place. Filling rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after dosing. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Lower limit pH Lower limit of the measured value. When the measured value falls below this value, the event Measured value lower limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 -20.000 Titrino Range Default value -20.00 ... 20.00 -20.00 Lower hysteresis pH Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Stop determination | Stop command (only Titrando) | Wait for [Continue] | Wait for limit ok | none none Stop determination The running DOS command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped. Stop command (only Titrando) The running DOS command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted and a message appears.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.2 °C Upper limit Upper limit of the temperature. When the temperature exceeds this value, the action Temperature upper limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted. As soon as the monitored temperature is once again within the limits (including hysteresis), reagent dosing will be resumed automatically. none No action will be taken if limits are exceeded. Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, max. 20 entries can be defined for the track that is to be started automatically when a particular limit is exceeded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.11.1, page 879). [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command DOS U are configured in the following 5 tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Dosing parameters Parameters for the dosing settings. Stop conditions Definition of conditions which cause the stop of the dosing. Monitoring Definition of measured value and temperature monitoring.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.3.5.2 Identification Description .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command .VOL Dosed volume DOS U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DOS U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 1 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 2 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing rate Rate at which dosing should take place. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered dosing rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. This parameter is only displayed for Dosing criterion = Volume/Dosing rate or Dosing rate/Dosing time. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.6.3.5.4 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 5.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 5s DOS U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DOS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off Stops when the preset time has elapsed since the start of the dosing. Filling rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after dosing. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered filling rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV -2000.0 mV Titrino Range Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV -2000 mV Lower hysteresis Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2.0 mV Upper limit Upper limit of the measured value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop determination The running DOS command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped. Stop command (only Titrando) The running DOS command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted and a message appears.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Upper limit Upper limit of the temperature. When the temperature exceeds this value, the action Temperature upper limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, a maximum of 20 entries can be defined as to which track is to be started automatically when a particular limit value is exceeded. [New] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for a new track call can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.6.3.3, page 1072). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for the selected track call can be edited(see Chapter 5.6.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command LQH are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭ ￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device and dosing device. Parameters Parameters for adjusting the Liquid Handling function. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command LQH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.6.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method of the working life, the validity of the titer and the GLP test interval for the selected solution. Input Selection Default value 24 characters 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. 5.6.6.4.3 LQH - Parameters Tab: Method ▶ LQH ▶ Properties... ▶ Parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The liquid handling function is defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Eject to end volume The whole cylinder content is ejected via the given port. In contrast to the function Eject to stop, the piston moves only to the maximum volume mark, i.e. until it has executed 10'000 pulses. This command should be used for pipetting functions for emptying the cylinder. Exchange position With this function the cylinder is filled via the given port first.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Volume Enter the volume to be moved. This parameter is available only for the Functions Dosing or Aspirate. Dosing Range Default value 0.00000 ... 99999.9 mL 10.0000 mL Aspirate Range Default value 0.00000 ... 50.0 mL 10.0000 mL Rate Speed at which the commands Dosing, Fill, Aspirate, Eject and Exchange position are carried out. The maximum rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.5 5.6.6.5.1 PREP PREP - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ PREP ▶ Properties... ▶ PREP - 'Command name' Command for Rinsing cylinder and tubing of an exchange or dosing unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended PREP - Properties Dialog window Method ▶ PREP ▶ Properties... ▶ PREP - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection 1|2|3 Default value 1 730, 774 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 758, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample Processor: 730, 774, 778, 789, 814, 815, 864, 874 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command EMPTY are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ EMPTY - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command EMPTY and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.6.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.7.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended RLS DOS - Properties Dialog window Method ▶ RLS DOS ▶ Properties... ▶ RLS DOS - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection 1|2|3 Default value 1 730, 774 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 1 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method run to see whether the correct solution has been attached to the selected dosing device.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.7.2 5.6.7.2.1 MOVE Moving to a rack position or an external position. SWING Swinging of the robotic arm (with Swing Head only). LIFT Moving to a lift position. PUMP Switching on/off the connected or built-in pumps. STIR Controlling a connected stirrer. Rack Initialization of the rack attached. HEATER Controlling the oven temperature of the 774 Oven Sample Processor. FLOW Regulation of the gas flow of the 774 Oven Sample Processor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .RAN Current, absolute rotation angle of the rack in ° in relation to the axis of the selected tower (entry when ending the command) .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Device types | 814 USB Sample Processor 814 USB Sample Processor Target Tower Selection of the tower of the Sample Processor for moving to the required lift position. Both Tower 1 and Tower 2 can always be selected even if the Sample Processor has only one tower.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Move = Special beaker (for 730) Range 1 ... 8 Default value 1 Move = Special beaker (for 774) Input 1 Move angle This parameter specifies the angle by which the sample rack should be rotated relative to the current position. It is only visible for Move = Relative angle. 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range -259.90 ... 259.90 ° Default value 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s Shift direction Selection of the shift direction of the sample rack. Selection Default value auto | + | – auto auto The direction of rotation with the smallest angle of rotation is selected automatically. + Rack rotates counterclockwise. – Rack rotates clockwise. Swing rate Selects speed of the robotic arm when moving to a rack position or a special beaker (only with multiple row sample racks).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command SWING are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ SWING - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SWING and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.7.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Swing angle Angle by which the robotic arm is to be swung relative to the current position. This parameter is visible only when Swing = Relative angle. Range Default value -180.0 ... 180.0 ° 10.0 ° Parameters Swing rate Speed of the robotic arm when swinging to an external position or a particular angle. Range Default value 5.6.7.4 5.6.7.4.1 10 ... 55 °/s 55 °/s LIFT LIFT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ LIFT ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7.4.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .LPO Current absolute lift position in mm (entry when ending the command) LIFT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ LIFT ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Target Tower Selection of the tower of the Sample Processor for moving to the required lift position. Both Tower 1 and Tower 2 can always be selected even if the Sample Processor has only one tower. Selection Default value 1|2 1 Lift position Entering the desired lift position in mm or selecting a lift position predefined for the rack Work position, Shift position, Rinse position or Special position. A lift height of 0 mm corresponds to the Home position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range 5 ... 25 mm/s Default value 25 mm/s 5.6.7.5 5.6.7.5.1 730 Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s 774 Range Default value 3 ... 12 mm/s 12 mm/s PUMP PUMP - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ PUMP ▶ Properties... ▶ PUMP - 'Command name' Command for controlling pumps connected to or built into the Sample Processor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended PUMP - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ PUMP ▶ Properties... ▶ PUMP - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 1|2 1 Pump(s) Selection of the pump that is to be actuated. The pump(s) can either be builtin or externally connected. With 1+2 both pumps at the selected tower will be switched at the same time. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 1+2 1 1 Pump 1 is actuated. 2 Pump 2 is actuated. 1+2 Both pumps at the selected tower will be switched at the same time.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Coulometer: 756, 831 Dosing Interface: 846 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample Processor: 730, 778, 789, 814, 815, 857, 864, 874 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command STIR are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ STIR - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command STIR and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command n
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Unknown is displayed either with devices unable to read out the stirrer type or if no stirrer is connected Selection 801 Magnetic Stirrer | 802 Rod Stirrer | 803 Ti Stand magnetic stirrer | 804 Ti Stand rod stirrer | unknown Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate or rotational speed. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Period of operation The stirrer can be switched on for a particular period. 5.6.7.7 5.6.7.7.1 Range Default value 0 ... 9999.9 10.0 Selection Default value s | min s RACK RACK - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ RACK ▶ Properties... ▶ RACK - 'Command name' Command for initialization of the attached sample rack. The rack, lift and robotic arm (if present) are reset, the rack code is read off and the corresponding rack data is transferred to the Sample Processor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.7.2 5 Method RACK - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ RACK ▶ Properties... ▶ RACK - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7.8 5.6.7.8.1 HEATER HEATER - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ HEATER ▶ Properties... ▶ HEATER - 'Command name' Command for controlling the oven temperature.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Off causes heating at the maximum possible heating rate (see device manual). Range Selection Default value 1 ... 999 min off off Timeout If the Target temperature is not reached within the defined Heating time then this waiting time will start. This parameter is only visible if a Heating time has been defined. Range Selection Default value 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command FLOW are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ FLOW - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command FLOW and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.7.9.2 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead. If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Gas flow Switch on | Switch off Switch on Selection Default value Switch on Switches on the gas flow. Switch off Switches off the gas flow. 5.6.7.10 RLS DEV 5.6.7.10.1 RLS DEV - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ RLS DEV ▶ Properties... ▶ RLS DEV - 'Device name' Command to release a device for using it in other parallel running methods. It removes the reservation made by the current method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7.10.2 Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended RLS DEV - Properties Dialog window Method ▶ RLS DEV ▶ Properties... ▶ RLS DEV - 'Command name'' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.8.2 5.6.8.2.1 CALC - Overview Calculation of intermediate and end results, titer values and common variables. DATABASE - Overview Storage of the determination data in data bases. REPORT - Overview Output of a report defined by a report template. EXPORT - Overview Export of determination data. CALC CALC - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended Result variables The following result variables are defined in the CALC command and can be used in formulas under the designation 'RS.ResultName.Variable designation': 5.6.8.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected result down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window New result in order to select a new template (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.3, page 1144). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Result - 'Result name' in order to edit the properties of the result selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.5.1, page 1146). [Delete] Deletes the result selected in the table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.2.3 CALC - New result Dialog window Method ▶ CALC ▶ [New] ▶ New result A template for the new result can be selected in this dialog window. Templates Selection of a result template as the basis for a new result. Selection Default value 'Result template' | Empty Empty 'Result template' Loads a saved result template. Pressing [Next >>] causes the dialog window Formula Assistant to open (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.4, page 1144). Empty Loads an empty result template.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Filling command variables] Transfer of command names of the selected variable to all command variables. Command names that were already entered will be overwritten. Select method variable All of the method variables of the formula template will be listed. 'Variable' Selection of the method variable. Selection 'Method variable' 'Method variable' Selection of a method variable defined in the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Enter constant All of the constants of the formula template will be listed. 'Constant' Entering the constants. Range Default value -1.0 E+99 ... 1.0E+99 (max. 15 places) 'empty' Opens molar mass calculator for entering molar masses (see Chapter 2.4.5, page 83). 5.6.8.2.5 5.6.8.2.5.1 CALC - Result properties Result - Definition Tab: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] ▶ [Continue] ▶ Result - Definition The result calculation is defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Decimal places Number of decimal places for the output of the calculated result. This parameter is ignored for results of the type text or date/time. Range Default value 0 ... 5 2 Assignment Assigns the result to one of the 25 possible result columns RS01 ... RS25 in the determination overview in which the result is entered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Save as template] Open the dialog window Save result template in order to save the result parameters as template for the creation of new results (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.6.2, page 1152). 5.6.8.2.5.2 Result - Monitoring Tab: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] ▶ [Continue] ▶ Result - Overview The parameters for monitoring the result are defined on this tab.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Record message on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be documented in the determination if the limits are exceeded. The run will not be stopped. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be sent to the address defined under [E-mail] in the event that the result limits are exceeded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.2.5.3 Result - Options Tab: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] ▶ [Continue] ▶ Result - Options The assignment of the result to a common variable, a global variable or a titer can be activated on this tab. Save result as common variable on | off (Default value: off) The result will be saved under the selected name as common variable if this option is activated (see Chapter 6.8.1, page 1332).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note If no solutions have been defined, then the selection box will be empty. The creation of solutions is described in the configuration (see Chapter 6.6.1, page 1285). Save result as global variable on | off (Default value: off) The result will be saved under the selected name as global variable if this option is activated (see Chapter 6.9, page 1341).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.2.6 5.6.8.2.6.1 CALC - Result templates Manage result templates Dialog window: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ [Templates] Result templates can be renamed and deleted in the Managing templates dialog window. Templates A result template can be renamed or deleted. Selection Default value 'Result templates' | 'empty' 'empty' Description Displaying the description of the selected result template. [Rename] Renames the selected result template.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Input Default value 100 characters 'Name of result template' Description Freely definable description of the result template. This description is displayed in the dialog windows New result and Manage templates. 1000 characters Input 5.6.8.3 5.6.8.3.1 DATABASE DATABASE - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DATABASE ▶ Properties... ▶ DATABASE - 'Command name' Command for the storage of determination data in one or more databases.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended DATABASE - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ DATABASE ▶ Properties... ▶ DATABASE - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.4 5.6.8.4.1 5 Method REPORT REPORT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ REPORT ▶ Properties... ▶ REPORT - 'Command name' Command for the output of determination data. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command REPORT are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ REPORT - Properties Note A REPORT command must always be placed before a DATABASE command, because otherwise the command data (e.g.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.4.2 REPORT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ REPORT ▶ Properties... ▶ REPORT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Report template Report template Selecting the predefined Report template which the report should be generated with. Selection 'Report templates' Report output Printer on | off (Default value: on) The report is printed on the selected printer if this option is activated.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.5 5.6.8.5.1 5 Method EXPORT EXPORT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ EXPORT ▶ Properties... ▶ EXPORT - 'Command name' Command for the Exporting determination data.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection 5.6.9 5.6.9.1 'Export template' Communications commands Communication commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New command... ▶ Communication Commands for communications within the program or with external devices. The following Communications commands can be selected: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.9.2 5.6.9.2.1 CTRL Setting remote output lines. SCAN Scanning remote input lines. SEND Sending event messages RECEIVE Waiting for event messages or status messages.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command CTRL are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ 5.6.9.2.2CTRL - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command CTRL and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.2.2 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Spectrometer Selection Default value Bit-pattern with exactly 10 characters (0, 1, *, p) | ********** | Signal pattern ********** The bits are numbered from right to left: Output 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Example: ************1* sets the output line 1 to enabled (= set), which would result in a stop command for a connected Titrino, for example. ************0* sets the line to inactive.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command SCAN are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ SCAN - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SCAN and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.3.2 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note Input lines that are of no interest or for which no defined condition can be predicted should also be masked with an asterisk *. Max. waiting time on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then a maximum waiting time can be entered for the input signal. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9999.9 10.0 Selection Default value min | s min Note If the option Max. waiting time is not activated, it is being waited endlessly for the input signal. 5.6.9.4 5.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SEND and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.4.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.9.4.3 SEND - Send event message Dialog window: Method ▶ SEND ▶ Properties... ▶ [New]/ [Properties] ▶ Send event message Recipient Selection of the type of recipient. System | Command System Selection Default value Selection Selection of the recipient address. All of the command names already defined in the method are available for Recipient Command. This field is empty and cannot be edited for Recipient System.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.2 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Recipient Selection Event message Significance Command All track commands Hold Hold selected track. Command All track commands Continue Continue selected track. Command All track commands Quit Cancel selected track. Command All commands Hold Hold selected command. Also valid for conditioning. Command All commands Continue Continue selected command. Also valid for conditioning.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note In order that the event message from the SEND command can be handled by the RECEIVE command, the RECEIVE command must be running and at the same time be able to process the message being sent. If, for example, a SEND command in track A should start a KFT command in track B by means of Start titration, then track B must be running and the conditioning in the KFT command must already be finished (= Cond ok) at the time that the SEND command is being executed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.9.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .TOU Timeout status: 1 = Max. waiting time expired; 0 = Max. waiting time not expired RECEIVE - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ RECEIVE ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Timeout on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then a maximum waiting time for event messages can be entered. If none of the conditions defined above are fulfilled after this time period, the command is canceled and the next command in the sequence is executed. Value Range Default value 0 ... 9999.9 0 Selection Default value min | s s Unit Message This message is displayed in the live window while waiting for the condition defined above.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Event/ Status Type Significance Commands Measure Event The measurement of the titration has been started. DET, MET Busy Status System is in status BUSY, HOLD or ERROR. All Finished Status Command has been terminated at least once. All Cond Status The command is currently in Conditioning status (COND BUSY or COND HOLD); the Start drift has not yet been reached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command TRANSFER are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ TRANSFER - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command TRANSFER and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.6.2 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 5.6.9.6.3 min | s s TRANSFER - Transfer command Dialog window: Method ▶ TRANSFER ▶ Properties... ▶ Transfer command Name Freely definable name for the transfer command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note All ASCII characters can be entered with its two-digit hex code after backslash (e.g. \1B = Escape). Variable Selection of an available method variable under which the received data for the Actions Read, Wait for and Scan will be saved. Method variables must be defined in the START command for this purpose which are not permitted to be assigned to any system variables. Method variables Selection Note It is also possible to create several indexed variables (e.g.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [abc] OR function for single characters receive a or b or c [a-z0-9] one character in the specified range m or 5 (hallo) substring string contains hallo ^hallo start of line hallo is at start of line hallo$ end of line hallo is at end of line . any single character a or 4 or - or … \. point .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command WEIGH are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ WEIGH - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command WEIGH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.7.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10 5.6.10.1 5 Method Miscellaneous commands Miscellaneous commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... These commands can be used independently of the connected devices. The following five commands can be selected: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.10.2 REQUEST Requesting sample data. CALL Calling tracks (subprograms). LOOP Multiple execution of a command sequence. WAIT Interrupts the method run. SEQUENCE Combines several commands to one command. REQUEST 5.6.10.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10.2.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended REQUEST - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ REQUEST ▶ Properties... ▶ REQUEST - Data input # Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note Text is selected as type in the default settings for the sample identifications ID1 … ID16. If you wish to enter numbers for these method variables for use in later calculations, then these variables must be switched in the dialog window Method variable - Sample position to the type number. START ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10.2.3 REQUEST - Sample data request Dialog window: Workplace ▶ [START] ▶ Sample data request Message Displaying the message defined in the command REQUEST. Sample position Position of the sample on the Sample Processor rack. This number can be used for moving to a sample position with the command MOVE when Target position = Sample position. Range Default value 1 ... 999 1 ID1 … ID16 Sample identifications. Type = Number Range -1.0E-99 ... 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note Sample data can be loaded directly from a balance or a barcode reader. The data import must be enabled for this purpose in the Run window in which the determination is started (Single determination or Determination series) and the corresponding devices must be defined. The dialog window Sample data request will be closed automatically after the data has been received from these devices.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command CALL and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.10.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Call to edit the call selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.10.3.3, page 1185). [Delete] Deletes the selected call. 5.6.10.3.3 CALL - Call Dialog window: Method ▶ CALL ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] Call text Text (can be edited to suit) for designating the call that is shown in the command presentation. Input Default value 50 characters 'empty' Track name Selecting the track to be called.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands A LOOP command just inserted has an arrow on the left-hand side with which a loop can be created by using the mouse to drag this arrow to the desired command in the same track. Two different types of loops will result, depending on whether the arrow has been dragged upward or downward: Repeat loop 1186 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The LOOP command is at the end of the loop for Repeat loops. As soon as one stop criterion is fulfilled (case 2), the command after the LOOP command is carried out. If no stop criterion is fulfilled, (case 1), the loop is run through again. In either case, the loop is run through at least once. The LOOP command is at the beginning of the loop for While loops.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.4.2 5 Method LOOP - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ LOOP ▶ Properties... ▶ LOOP - Loop # Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Stop criteria Definition of three possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the loop. Maximum run number on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the maximum number of runs will be used as stop criterion by repeat and while loops.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The input field contains the expression for the condition(s) which can be created or edited with the formula editor after pressing on or doubleclicking in the text field (see Chapter 2.4, page 25). If the condition is fulfilled (evaluation of the formula gives the result 1 = true), then the loop will be canceled when the LOOP command is called. Input Default value 5.6.10.5 5.6.10.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.5.2 5 Method WAIT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ WAIT ▶ Properties... ▶ WAIT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Record message on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be documented in the determination. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be sent to the address defined under [E-mail]. [E-mail] Open the dialog window Send E-mail for defining the E-mail parameters (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.6.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended SEQUENCE - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ SEQUENCE ▶ Properties... ▶ SEQUENCE - Sequence # Command name Name of the command.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Use this context-sensitive menu item to paste the commands at the end of the table that were copied onto the clip board. Paste 5.6.11 5.6.11.1 ProcessLab commands ProcessLab commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Commands for controllers which are controlled by ProcessLab. The following commands can be selected: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 5.6.11.2 5.6.11.2.1 DIGITAL OUT Actuation of digital outputs. DIGITAL IN Loading of digital inputs.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Once the command has expired, the statuses and the set values of all of the digital outputs used in the command are saved to command variables. Parameters The parameters for the command DIGITAL OUT are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭ ￭ General Digital outputs Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DIGITAL OUT and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.11.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Note If the option not defined is selected, then no ports can be selected in the Digital outputs tab, because it is not known to which device this block refers. If a method is generated independently of a device, then a device for the editing of the block will nevertheless still need to be selected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Functions Moves the selected line up. Moves the selected line down. [New] Opens the dialog window Digital output # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.2.4, page 1197). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Digital output # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.6.11.2.4, page 1197). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.11.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start delay Waiting time in seconds or minutes before the initiated action is started. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 0 Selection Default value s | min s Working time The time for which the digital output can be set to ACTIVATED can be specified in seconds or minutes when Action = Timer. It is reset to DEACTIVATED after the working time has expired. Range Default value 0.01 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 5.6.11.3 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 DIGITAL IN 5.6.11.3.1 DIGITAL IN - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DIGITAL IN ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL').
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.3.3 5 Method DIGITAL IN - Stop criteria Tab: Method ▶ DIGITAL IN ▶ Stop criteria Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Stop criteria Definition of possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the command. Maximum run time on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching on/off the stop criterion Maximum run time. If the maximum run time is reached, then the command will be stopped.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.4 5.6.11.4.1 ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ ANALOG OUT ▶ Properties... ▶ ANALOG OUT - 'Command name' Devices This command can be executed with the IO Controller. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Mode of operation The values which are written to the analog outputs can be either calculation results or fix values.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL'). The value returned corresponds to the status of the IO port after completion of the command ANALOG OUT - General Tab: Method ▶ ANALOG OUT ▶ Properties... ▶ General Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands If a command block originates from a different device, the Port description of which does not exist on the currently selected device, then the affected lines will be presented in red script. Functions Moves the selected line up. Moves the selected line down. [New] Opens the dialog window Analog output # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.4.4, page 1204). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Analog output # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Mapping range and unit of the value are defined in the configuration of the analog output. If the value that is to be written is less than 0% mapping, then the smallest possible value (low level (0%)) will be output; in the case of values greater than 100% mapping, the largest possible value (high level (100%)) will be output. 5.6.11.5 ANALOG IN 5.6.11.5.1 ANALOG IN - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ ANALOG IN ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.5.2 Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .UNI Mapping unit which is defined in the configuration for an IO port. .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL').
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop criteria Definition of possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the command. Maximum run time on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching on/off the stop criterion Maximum run time. If the maximum run time is reached, then the command will be stopped. Range Default value Selection Default value 0 ... 999.9 0 min | s min Note The run time is interrupted if the method is stopped with [HOLD].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Mode of operation Stepping motors can be actuated with time controls. Parameters The parameters for the command STEPPING MOTOR are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭ ￭ General Stepping motors Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command STEPPING MOTOR and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.11.6.2 Identification Description .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Note If the option not defined is selected, then no ports can be selected in the Stepping motors tab, because it is not known to which device this block refers. If a method is generated independently of a device, then a device for the editing of the block will nevertheless still need to be selected. One can however afterwards set the device name back to not defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window Stepping motor # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.6.4, page 1210). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Stepping motor # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.6.11.6.4, page 1210). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.11.6.4 STEPPING MOTOR - Stepping motor # Dialog: Method ▶ STEPPING MOTOR ▶ Stepping motor ▶ Properties ▶ STEPPING MOTOR - Stepping motor # Port description Selection of the stepping motor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 mm 0 mm Angle The angle to be moved to. Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 ° 0° Note The moving direction of the stepping motor depends on the algebraic sign of the value for Distance or Angle: ￭ ￭ ≥0: Move in positive direction.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands s | min s Selection Default value 5.6.11.7 5.6.11.7.1 PORT PORT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ PORT ▶ Properties... ▶ PORT - 'Command name' Command for changing the port position on a multi-port valve.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.7.2 5 Method PORT - Properties Dialog window Method ▶ PORT ▶ Properties... ▶ PORT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over automatic ascending The valve moves towards the target port in ascending direction. descending The valve moves towards the target port in descending direction. automatic The valve determines the shortest path to the target port on its own. not over The valve moves towards the target port in such a way that the port specified in the parameter Not over will not be traversed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6 Configuration 6.1 Configuration - General 6.1.1 Configuration - Definition Program part: Configuration Definition Configuration is to be understood as all of the tiamo settings for devices, titrants/solutions, sensors, common variables and rack data. Configuration also includes methods, security settings, user administration, program administration, templates, and Audit Trail. Organization All configuration data is saved in the configuration database.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General 6.1.3 Configuration - Menu bar 6.1.3.1 Configuration - Main menus Program part: Configuration The menu bar in the program part Configuration includes the following main menu items: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.1.3.2 File Export, import, backup, restore configuration data. View Change layout, load view, save view, quick access to subwindows. Tools User administration, security settings, program administration, Audit Trail, templates, options.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Load view... Loads a saved configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.3, page 94). Save view... Saves current configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.4, page 94). Quick access Opens a subwindow not contained in the current configuration view. Toolbar Switch toolbar display on/off. 6.1.3.4 Configuration - Menu Tools Program part: Configuration Manual control Manually control the devices connected (see Chapter 8.1, page 1506).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General 6.1.4 Configuration - Toolbar Program part: Configuration Change layout... Modifies layout of loaded configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.2, page 93). Load view... Loads a saved configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.3, page 94). Save view Saves current configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.4, page 94). User administration… Manages users and groups of users with access rights, signature rights and options (see Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 1223).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Presentation The subwindows can be enlarged or made smaller to suit by dragging the separating bar between the windows. By clicking on the button above at the right, the subwindows can be maximized so that only one subwindow is displayed in the main window. The original view of all subwindows is restored when the button in the maximized subwindow is clicked on again. Via the menu item View ▶ Quick access...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General Backup/Restore configuration data ￭ ￭ ￭ Backup configuration data automatically Backup configuration data manually Restore configuration data Templates ￭ ￭ ￭ Custom calibration buffers Input lines Output lines Options ￭ 6.1.7 6.1.7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Automatic load The standard procedure is that the view saved when the program is terminated will be loaded automatically the next time that the program is opened. As an alternative a standard view can be defined for each user group that is loaded automatically the first time that the program part is opened.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General Move the selected subwindow upward (modifies sequence). Move the selected subwindow downward (modifies sequence). 6.1.7.3 Load view Dialog window: Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Load view… ▶ Load view or the menu item View ▶ Load view... the dialog With the symbol window Load view is opened. Name Name of the view that should be loaded. [Rename] Rename the selected view. [Delete] Delete the selected view. [Load] Load the selected view. 6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1.7.5 6 Configuration Rename view Dialog window: Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Rename view… ▶ Rename view To be able to rename a view, either open the dialog window Load View or Save View and press the [Rename] button. The Rename View window is opened. Rename view to Enter a new name for the view. Input 6.1.7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration groups with their assigned users are listed in tree-form, the right-hand side shows details of the selected items. Each user group, with the exception of the Removed users group, contains the following items: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ Access rights Assigns access rights to the four program parts and their menu bars. Signatures Assigns signature rights for methods and determinations. Options Defines the view for the individual program parts. Users Details of the users.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [Rename group] Renames selected user group. [Delete group] Deletes selected user group. [Copy group] Copies selected user group. [Add group] Adds new user group. User group members The table showing the group members contains information about all members of the selected user group. The table can neither be edited nor sorted. User Short name of the user. Full name Full name of the user. Status Current user status.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Enlarge view P Program part Reduce view M Menu item Full access to function(s) F Function Limited access to function(s) No access to function(s) Note In the Administrators group all access rights are switched on as standard and cannot be modified. 6.2.1.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value off | on off Permissions for determinations Signature Level 1 If this check box is enabled then users in this user group can electronically sign determinations at Level 1. Selection Default value off | on off Signature Level 2 (lock) If this check box is enabled then users in this user group can electronically sign determinations at Level 2 and at the same time lock them against further modifications.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Selection Default value 6.2.1.2.4 off | on off User administration - Options Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ User administration If in the left-hand part of the dialog window User administration the item Options is marked for a user group then options for this group will be shown in the right-hand part and can be modified there. Default workplace view Selection of the view that will open in the program part Workplace as standard when the user logs in.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration With [OK] a new group is generated under this name with standard settings; it does not contain any users. The Description field and the table of group members are empty. 6.2.1.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.3.1 User User - Details Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ User administration If in the left-hand side of the dialog window User administration a user in a user group has been selected, then details of the user will be shown at the right-hand side. User Shows the short name of the user that must be entered in the field User. This name is defined when a new user is entered for the first time and cannot be subsequently modified.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration new start password when adding a new user or after a change in status to activated. If the user has logged in with the start password and then entered a new password, then the start password is deleted again. Input 50 characters [Set start password] Opens the dialog window Start password. This button is enabled only for users with the status activated. If a user has forgotten his/her password then the Administrator can issue a new start password here.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Start password Enter a new start password. Password options are not used for the start password. 50 characters Input Confirm password Confirms the start password. 50 characters Input 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 Security settings Security settings Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings Overview In the dialog window Security settings the parameters for log-in, password protection, Audit Trail and electronic signatures can be configured.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration ￭ 6.2.2.2 Default reasons Definition of reasons for signing and modifying methods, determinations and sample data. Login/Password protection Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings ▶ Login/Password protection On the tab Login/Password protection is defined whether the user must log in with his/her name or with name and password, and how the password is to be monitored and constructed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Password monitoring by Windows If this option is enabled then the password will be monitored according to the parameters defined in Windows. In this case the parameters for password protection are deactivated.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: off Range Default value 2 ... 5 3 FDA default: 3 Message by E-mail If this check box is activated then an E-mail will be sent to the address defined under [E-mail] as soon as the defined number of login attempts has been exceeded. Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: off [E-mail] This button opens the dialog window Send E-mail(see Chapter 6.2.2.7, page 1240) for defining the E-mail parameters.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration gency stop, which are always possible for all running determinations and series. If this check box is deactivated then the newly logged-in user will have all the rights for the opened workplaces that his/her group assignment authorizes him/her to. For running determinations the new user name applies immediately (Audit Trail entries, Save, Export, etc.).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: off Minimum password length If this check box is activated then this ensures that the password must contain the indicated number of characters. Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: on Range Default value 1 ... 10 Characters 6 Characters FDA default: 6 characters Validity If this check box is activated then this ensures that the user must enter a new password before the validity period expires.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.2.2.4 Audit Trail/Modifications Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings ▶ Audit Trail/Modifications Audit Trail recording is enabled and disabled on the Audit Trail/Modifications tab. When a method, determination or sample data is modified, you can also define whether or not a reason must be given for the modification together with comments. Settings according to 21 CFR 11 [Set] Sets the parameters to default settings for FDA-compliant work.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Comment on modification of sample data (live) If this check box is activated then each time that a determination is modified a modification reason and a modification comment must be entered; these are saved in the determination and shown in the database in the subwindow Information on the tab Sample. The reason and comments are also recorded in the Audit Trail. Selection Default value 6.2.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.2.2.6 Default reasons Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings ▶ Default reasons On the tab Default reasons the reasons are defined that have to be entered when methods and determinations have to be signed for, or when methods, determinations and sample data are modified. Category Selection of the category for which the reasons are to be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Message The message defined here will be transmitted as an E-mail if the maximum permitted number of login attempts is exceeded. The Text editor for entering or changing the message is opened with or by double-clicking into the text field. Selection Text (unlimited) Sender E-mail address E-Mail address of the sender. Input 200 characters SMTP server Address of SMTP mail server. Input 200 characters Port Port number of the SMTP mail server.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration User Name of the user for access to mail server. The name need not agree with the Windows user name. 200 characters Input Password Password for the access to the mail server. This password does not necessarily have to be identical to the Windows password. 200 characters Input 6.2.3 6.2.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [New] Adds a new backup directory (see Chapter 6.2.3.2.2, page 1243). [Edit] Edits the selected backup directory (see Chapter 6.2.3.2.3, page 1244). [Delete] Deletes the selected backup directory. Note The Default backup directory cannot be deleted. 6.2.3.2.2 Create new backup directory Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Program administration ▶ Backup directories ▶ [New] ▶ New backup directory Name Name for the backup directory.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.2.3.2.3 Edit backup directory Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Program administration ▶ Backup directories ▶ [Edit] ▶ Edit backup directory Name Name for the backup directory. 50 characters Input Note The Default backup directory generated during installation cannot be renamed. Directory Entry or selection (with ) of the path for the backup directory.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Computer name Shows the name of the computer on which the client has been installed. Status Shows whether tiamo has been started (active) or not (inactive). Note The contents of the tab Clients can be displayed, even if tiamo is not running, by using the shortcut in the directory ..\\Metrohm\ \tiamo\\bin (only available on the server). 6.2.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data License code Entry of the license code. 6.3 Configuration data 6.3.1 Export/Import 6.3.1.1 Export configuration data Dialog window: Configuration ▶ File ▶ Export… ▶ Export configuration data With File ▶ Export... the dialog window Export configuration data opens, in which the following parts of the configuration database can be selected for export: Devices on | off (Default value: on) Exports configuration data for devices (see Chapter 6.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Sample solutions (TC conductivity) on | off (Default value: on) Exports the configuration data for calculating the temperature coefficients of sample solutions (see Chapter 6.10.2, page 1350). Configuration views on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved configuration views (see Chapter 3.1.7, page 92). Workplace views on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved workplace views (see Chapter 3.1.7.1, page 92).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data E-mail templates on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved E-mail templates (see Chapter 6.3.3.5, page 1259). Text templates on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved text templates (see Chapter 3.5, page 120). Sample assignment table on | off (Default value: on) Exports the saved sample assignment table (see Chapter 3.4, page 118). Security settings on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.1, page 1232).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Devices on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for devices (see Chapter 6.5.1, page 1279). Titrants/Solutions on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for titrants and solutions (see Chapter 6.6.2.1, page 1286). Sensors on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for sensors (see Chapter 6.7.2.1, page 1309). Common variables on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for common variables (see Chapter 6.8.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Workplace views on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved workplace views (see Chapter 3.1.7.1, page 92). Database views on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved database views (see Chapter 3.1.7, page 92). Result templates on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved result templates (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.6.1, page 1152). Control chart templates on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved control card templates (see Chapter 4.4.2.1, page 240).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Sample assignment table on | off (Default value: on) Imports the saved sample assignment table (see Chapter 3.4, page 118). Security settings on | off (Default value: on) Imports security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.1, page 1232). User administration on | off (Default value: on) Imports user administration (see Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 1223). [OK] The selected data is imported. 6.3.2 Backup/Restore 6.3.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Interval Entry of the time interval after which an automatic backup will take place. After each automatic or manual backup the interval entered here will be added to the date of the Last backup and shown in the field Next backup. Range Default value Selection Default value 1 ... 999 1 Day(s) | Week(s) | Month(s) | Year(s) Month(s) Backup directory Selection of a pre-defined backup directory (see Chapter 6.2.3.2.1, page 1242).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note If the backup directory is on a network drive, the backup date should be added manually to the Backup name because the backup date information is not available when the directory is restored. [Start] Start manual backup of complete configuration database (including method groups and methods). 6.3.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data 6.3.3 Templates 6.3.3.1 Template - Custom calibration buffer Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Custom calibration buffer You can define 5 of your own calibration buffers for pH calibration with automatic buffer recognition in the dialog window Custom calibration buffers. This buffer series is globally valid and can be selected as buffer type Custom in the command CAL LOOP pH.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3.3.2 6.3.3.2.1 6 Configuration Templates for input lines Managing the templates for input lines Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Input lines... ▶ Templates for input lines In the dialog window Templates for input lines, client-specific bit-patterns for scanning remote input signals can be defined which can be selected with the command SCAN and in Manual Control.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Example: *******1 expects an active input line 0 (1 = set). For example, this line is set by a Titrino after a titration has been completed and the Titrino can accept a start signal again. Note Input lines that are of no interest or for which no defined condition can be predicted should also be masked with an asterisk *. 6.3.3.3 6.3.3.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Output signal Entry of the bit-pattern for the output signal with exactly 14 characters.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data 6.3.3.4 6.3.3.4.1 Templates - Conductivity standards Manage conductivity standards Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Conductivity standards ▶ Conductivity standards Conductivity standards can be defined in the dialog window, which can be selected with the command CAL Cond. The table cannot be edited. [New] Creation of a new conductivity standard.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [New] Creation of a new value pair. The window Edit value pair opens, in which a new value pair can be entered (see Chapter 6.3.3.4.3, page 1259). [Edit] Edits the selected value pair. The window Edit value pair opens, in which the value pair can be edited (see Chapter 6.3.3.4.3, page 1259). [Delete] Deletes the selected value pair. 6.3.3.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data [Delete] Deletes the selected template. [Copy] Copies the selected template and saves it under the name Copy of..... 6.3.3.5.2 Edit E-mail templates Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ E-mail templates... ▶ E-mail templates ▶ [New] / [Properties] ▶ Edit E-mail template With [New] or [Edit] in the E-mail templates dialog window, the dialog window Edit E-mail template opens for entering a new template or for editing an existing template.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value SMTP | SMTP after POP SMTP POP server Address of POP mail server. Input 3 … 200 characters Port Port number of the POP mail server. Range Default value 1 ... 1 … 65536 110 User Name of the user for access to mail server. The name need not agree with the Windows user name. Input 2 … 50 characters Password Password for access to the mail server. This password does not necessarily have to be identical to the Windows password. Input 6.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Selection Default value German | English | additional languages (dependent on installed language patches) English Note For the altered setting to become effective the program must be restarted. Emergency stop button If this option is enabled then the emergency stop button will be shown in all program parts.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Workplace settings on | off (Default value: off) Switches Save workplace view on/off when exiting the program. Database settings on | off (Default value: off) Switches Save database view on/off when exiting the program. 6.3.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4.1 Audit Trail - General 6.4.1.1 Audit Trail - Definition Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail Definition The term Audit Trail means the FDA-compliant logging of all user actions with which in tiamo data is generated, altered or deleted. Each of these actions is saved as a line in the Audit Trail table together with the date, time and name of the logged-in user.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.1.3 6 Configuration Audit Trail - Menu bar 6.4.1.3.1 Audit Trail - Main menus Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail The menu bar in the Audit Trail program window contains the following main menu items: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.4.1.3.2 File Prints, exports, archives, deletes Audit Trail View Updates table, defines column display. Filter Defines and uses special filters and quick filters.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Special filter... Defines and uses special filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.1, page 1271). Remove filter Removes current filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.5, page 1275). 6.4.1.3.5 Audit Trail - Menu Tools Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail Monitoring Defines Audit Trail table monitoring (see Chapter 6.4.2.9, page 1278). Installation log Opens log file for installation.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value All entries | Quick filter | Temporary filter | Filter name All entries All entries The table is shown unfiltered. Quick filter The table is filtered according to the last defined Quick filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.3, page 1271). Temporary filter The table is filtered according to the last defined, not saved Special filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.1, page 1271).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4.1.7 Audit Trail - Functions Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail In the Audit Trail program window the following functions can be carried out: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.4.2 6.4.2.1 Filter Audit Trail Update Audit Trail Export Audit Trail Archive Audit Trail Delete Audit Trail Print Audit Trail Audit Trail table Audit-Trail - Table Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Date Date, time and time zone of the action. User Short name of the logged-in user. Full name Full name of the logged-in user. Client Name of the Client on which the action was carried out or which is affected by the action. Category Program part to which the action belonged. Action Short description of the action. Details Detailed information about the action. Archived Shows whether the action has already been archived or not (only archived actions can be deleted).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.4.2.2 Filter Audit Trail Update Audit Trail Export Audit Trail Archive Audit Trail Delete Audit Trail Print Audit Trail Monitor Audit Trail Verify Audit Trail Audit Trail - Column display Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ View ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display View ▶ Column display… opens the dialog window Column display. Here you can define the columns that are to be shown in the Audit Trail table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration ￭ 6.4.2.3.2 Remove filter Audit Trail - Last filter Menu item: Audit Trail ▶ Filter ▶ Last filter With the menu item Filter ▶ Last filter or the symbol in the Audit Trail program window, the previously used filter is reactivated. 6.4.2.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail [Save filter] Opens the dialog window Save filter in which the filter criteria entered in the table can be saved as a special filter under the required name (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.3, page 1274). [Delete filter] Deletes the special filter that is currently loaded. Table view The overview table shows all the defined filter criteria and cannot be directly edited.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.2.3.4.2 6 Configuration Special filter - Editing filter criterion Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ Filter ▶ Special filter... ▶ Special filter - Database 'ConfigDB' ▶ [Edit] ▶ Edit line ▶ Edit filter criterion # With [Edit] ▶ Edit line the dialog window Edit filter criterion # opens in which the filter criterion selected in the filter table can be edited. Link Selection of the type of link (logic operator) with the previous filter criterion.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Note If for the column Date, the Operator Today is selected then filtering will be carried out for the actual date. In the field Comparative value, a range in days (-9999 … 9999) can also be defined for filtering based on the current date. Comparative value Selection or entry of the comparative value for the filter criterion. for fields of type 'Text' Input 250 characters ^* can be used as a wildcard for any strings.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Filter name Name under which the special filter is to be saved. 50 characters Input [Save] Saves filter under given name. Note The filters are saved globally in the configuration database and are therefore available for all clients. 6.4.2.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Selection Selection Default value All records | Selected records All records All records All the entries from the filtered Audit Trail table are exported. Selected records Only the entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be exported. Note Audit Trail entries are exported in text format and cannot be imported back into the Audit Trail table. The export file contains a checksum which allows to verify whether the file has been modified later on. 6.4.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to exporting them, i.e. the Audit Trail entries are stored in text format and cannot be imported back into the Audit Trail Table. The difference between this and exporting is that the archived entries can be marked in the column Archive and then deleted. The archive file contains a checksum which allows to verify whether the file has been modified later on. 6.4.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail 24 characters Input 6.4.2.8 Print Audit Trail Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ File ▶ Print (PDF)... ▶ Print Audit Trail (PDF) The menu item File ▶ Print (PDF)... or the symbol in the Audit Trail program window is used to open the dialog window Print Audit Trail (PDF). Selection Selection Default value All records | Selected records Selected records All records All the entries from the filtered Audit Trail table will be printed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Maximum number Maximum number of entries allowed in the Audit Trail table. If this number is exceeded an error message appears. Range Default value 6.4.2.10 10 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices Peripheral devices of USB devices Peripheral devices connected to USB devices (e.g. dosing devices, stirrers, etc.) are also recognized automatically. If they are connected or removed while a program is running, then after confirming a corresponding message, either the device must be reinitialized, the USB connection must be interrupted and then re-established or the program must be restarted.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note The device status is permanently monitored and updated for USB devices only. For Metrohm devices with RS-232 connection, the current status at the last access to the device is shown always. For balances, barcode readers and generic RS-232 devices, the status cannot be monitored. It will be set to ok after confirmation of the connection test. Start-up Date on which the device was added to the device table. Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is due.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices Functions The menu [Edit] beneath the device table contains the following menu items: New… Adds manually a new device connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface(see Chapter 6.5.2.2, page 1282). Delete Deletes the selected device. Only devices that are not connected can be deleted(see Chapter 6.5.2.3, page 1282). Properties… Edits the selected device (see Chapter 6.5.3, page 1284). Column display… Defines columns for the device table(see Chapter 6.5.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5.2.4 6 Configuration Devices - Column display Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display With[Edit] ▶ Column display…, the dialog window Column display opens. Here you can define the columns that are to be shown in the device table. Available columns Shows all the fields that can be shown as columns in the device table. Displayed columns Shows all the fields that will be shown as columns in the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices Table contents The following information concerning the ignored devices is shown in the table: Device type Type of device. Device serial number Serial number of the instrument. [Delete] The highlighted device is removed from the list. It will be recognized automatically again at the time of the next program start and can be included in the list of devices. 6.5.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 756/831 Coulometer 712 Conductometer 856 Conductometer 867 pH Module 846 Dosing Interface 730 Sample Changer 774 Oven Sample Processor 778/789 Sample Processor 814/815 Sample Processor 855 Robotic Titroprocessor 864 Balance Sample Processor 874 Oven Sample Processor Avantes Spectrometer RS-232 device Balance Barcode reader IO controller Stepping motor controller 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Non-intelligent exchange units (EU) and dosing units (DU) Non-intelligent exchange and dosing units must be added manually to the solution table. 6.6.2 Solution table 6.6.2.1 Solution table Subwindow:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions Contents In the solution table the following information about automatically recognized or manually added solutions is shown as standard: Solution name Name of the solution.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration With menu item [Edit] ▶ Column display... further columns from the solution properties can be shown. Note Lines that contain red entries will also show the line number with a red background. Table view The solution table cannot be edited directly. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Note Solutions in intelligent 806 Exchange Units (IEU) or 807 Dosing Units (IDU) with data chip need only be manually added and configured when they are fitted to devices that cannot read out the data automatically (e.g. Titrino, 700 Dosino). 6.6.2.3 Delete solution Menu item:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete With [Edit] ▶ Delete, the solution selected in the solution table is deleted. 6.6.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.2.5 6 Configuration Print list of solutions Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Print (PDF)… ▶ Print list of solutions (PDF) [Edit] ▶ Print (PDF)… opens the dialog window Print list of solutions (PDF). Orientation Selection Default value Portrait | Landscape Portrait Portrait Prints the solution table in portrait format. Landscape Print the solution table in landscape format.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.3.2 Properties - Solution Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Solution - 'Name' ▶ Solution Solution name Name of the solution (can be entered or selected). Input 24 characters Selection Selection from predefined names Concentration (value) Concentration value of the solution.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Range Default value 0 ... 999 Days 999 Days Expiry date Expiry date of the solution. The date can be selected by pressing in the dialog window Select date. When a date has been entered the Working life will be automatically adapted. Selection Date selection Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.3.3 Properties - Titer Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Titer Titer determination Titer (value) Titer value of the solution. The value for the titer of a solution used by the titration commands DET, MET, SET and KFT is available for calculations as a variable 'Command name.TITER''Command name. Range Default value 1E-12 ... 1E+12 (max. 10 digits) 1.000 Titer (unit) Titer unit of the solution.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Rel. standard dev. (s rel) Relative standard deviation for the titer determination in %. Monitoring titer validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the validity of the titer will be monitored. Validity Validity of the titer in days. If a value is entered here then the date for the Next titer determination will be automatically adapted. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note This parameter is not saved on the data chip of intelligent exchange/dosing units, i.e. this parameter will be empty if the data are written into the solutions table from the IEU/IDU. User Short name of the user logged in during titer determination or when the titer was entered manually. If work is not carried out using login then the user logged in under Windows will be entered automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.3.5 Titer history Limit values Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Titer history ▶ [Limit values] ▶ Limit values titer Warning and intervention limits can be defined for the titer in the dialog window Limits for titer. If you have defined limits then these will be shown in the graph in orange for warning limits and red for intervention limits. Whether these limits are observed is not monitored, i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.3.6 6 Configuration Properties - Exchange unit Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Exchange unit Hardware Name Freely definable designation for exchange unit. Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Type Shows the type of exchange unit: Selection EU | IEU EU Non-intelligent exchange unit without data chip. IEU Intelligent 806 Exchange Unit with data chip. Order number Order number of exchange unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions IEU Input Default value 8 characters 'empty' EU Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Parameters for preparation Configures the parameters to be used in the command PREP. Volume Volume to be dosed in during preparation. Range Selection Default value 0.00000 ... 99999.99999 mL Cylinder volume Cylinder volume Cylinder volume The whole contents of the cylinder will be dosed in. Cycles Number of rinsing cycles during preparation.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Maximum Dosing/Filling rate for exchange unit as a function of the cylinder volume: Cylinder volume Maximum rate 1 mL 3.0 mL/min 5 mL 15.0 mL/min 10 mL 30.0 mL/min 20 mL 60.0 mL/min 50 mL 150.0 mL/min Note Enter lower rates for high-viscosity liquids. Tubing parameters Defines the length and diameter of the tubing connected to the exchange unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Length Length of the tubing connecting the cock to the cylinder. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 13.0 cm Diameter Diameter of the tubing connecting the cock to the cylinder. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Reagent bottle Length Length of the tubing connecting the cock to the reagent bottle. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 25.0 cm Diameter Diameter of the tubing connecting the cock to the reagent bottle.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.3.7 6 Configuration Properties - Dosing unit Tab:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ Properties... ▶ Dosing unit Hardware Name Freely definable name for the dosing unit. Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Type Shows the type of dosing unit: Selection DU | IDU DU Non-intelligent dosing unit without data chip. IDU Intelligent 807 Dosing Unit with data chip. Order number Order number of dosing unit.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Serial number Serial number of dosing unit. With intelligent dosing units the serial number is read off automatically and cannot be edited. Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Cylinder volume Cylinder volume of dosing unit. With intelligent dosing units the cylinder volume is read off automatically and cannot be edited.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Dosing rate Dosing port 2 Speed at which dosing is to be carried out at Dosing port 2. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit used (see below). When the function is carried out the speed will automatically be reduced to the largest possible value. Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Dosing rate Fill port Speed at which dosing or filling is to be carried out at the Fill port.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Tubing parameters Defines the length and diameter of the tubing connected to the dosing unit. The port assignment can also be altered. These parameters are important for carrying out the dosing unit commands PREP and EMPTY correctly, as the volumes of the tubing connections have to be taken into account. Note Default values have already been entered for the tubing parameters; these correspond to the dimensions of the standard tubing supplied.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 6 Configuration 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 0.0 cm Diameter Diameter of tubing attached to Dosing port 2. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Fill port Port Port to be used as Fill port for aspirating the solution. Selection Default value Port 1 | Port 2 | Port 3 | Port 4 Port 2 Length Length of tubing attached to Fill port. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 25.0 Diameter Diameter of tubing attached to Fill port. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Port assignment of dosing unit: Valve disc Rotating direction Specification of the shift direction of the valve disc. Automatic is the shift direction with the shortest distance. Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over automatic Not over Here you can choose the protected port. The protected port is the one which is not driven at during rotation. Selection Default value 6.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test. Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Acoustic signal on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, an acoustic signal will be emitted additionally to the message defined above Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Standard sensors The sensor table contains the following sensors as standard; these cannot be deleted: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.7.2 Conductivity sensor ISE electrode (ion-selective electrode) Metal electrode pH electrode Temperature sensor Sensor table 6.7.2.1 Sensor table Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Sensors Contents In the sensor table the following information about the configured sensors is shown as standard: Sensor name Name of the sensor. Sensor type Type of the sensor.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors pH(0)/E(0) Electrode zero point of the sensor. Next calibration Date on which the next calibration is to be carried out. If calibration data monitoring is switched on and if the set date is before the current date (i.e. the calibration has not yet been carried out) then the date will be shown in red. Additional columns from the Sensor properties can be shown with the menu item Edit ▶ Column display.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7.2.2 6 Configuration Sensors - Column display Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Sensors ▶ Edit ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display In the dialog window [Column display], you can define the columns to be shown in the sensor table. Columns available Shows all the fields that can be shown as columns in the Sensor table. Columns displayed Shows all the fields that will be shown as columns in the Sensor table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Ion Selection Default value Ag | BF4 | Br | Ca | Cd | Cl | CN | Cu | F | I | K | Na | NH4 | NO2 | NO3 | Pb | S | SCN | SO4 | Surfactant | Custom F F Selection of the measuring ion from the list or defines another ion with Custom. The valency of the selected measuring ion will also be shown automatically. Name Entry of the name for the self-selected ion. This parameter is only visible if Custom has been selected in the field Ion.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [OK] The sensor table is produced in the required format as a PDF file and can be opened directly with Acrobat Reader; it can then be printed out and/or saved. 6.7.3 Sensor properties 6.7.3.1 Edit sensor properties Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Sensors ▶ Edit ▶ Sensor With the menu item Edit ▶ Properties… in the subwindow Sensors, the properties window for the sensor selected in the sensor table opens in which the parameters of the sensor can be edited.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Order number Order number of the sensor (read-only for intelligent sensors and the Thermoprobe). Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Sensor serial number Serial number of the sensor (read-only for intelligent sensors and the Thermoprobe). Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Device For non-intelligent sensors it is possible to select the device to which the sensor is connected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Sensor monitoring on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled then the working life of the sensor will be monitored. Working life Working life of the sensor in days. If a value is entered here then the Expiry date will be automatically adapted. Range Default value 0 ... 999 days 999 days Expiry date Expiry date of the sensor. The date can be selected by pressing in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Document message The message that the working life of the sensor has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can select whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued, then the message that the working life of the sensor has expired will be saved automatically with the determination. Cancel determination The running determination will be automatically canceled.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration slope of an ISE electrode is available for calculations as the variable 'Command name.SLO. Range Default value -999.9 ... 999.9 mV 59.2/Valency mV E(0) E(0) is the second characteristic quantity of the calibration function U = f(log c). E(0) is the y-axis intercept of the calibration curve and corresponds to the potential at log c = 0. The electrode zero point E(0) of an ISE electrode is available as a variable 'Command name.ENP' for calculations.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Shared calibration data Calibration temp. Temperature during the calibration. The display also shows whether the temperature was measured with a Pt1000 or an NTC temperature sensor or entered manually (is not being displayed for the Thermoprobe). Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note The days are monitored, e.g. the calibration becomes invalid when the date changes and not at the time time of day that calibration took place. Can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Range 0 ... 999 days Default value 999 days Next calibration Date on which the next calibration is to be carried out. The date can be in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter selected by pressing 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Document message The message that the validity of the calibration has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can select whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity of the calibration has expired will be saved automatically with the determination. Cancel determination The running determination will be automatically canceled.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 25.0 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -31.0 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 16.0 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -23.0 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 12.0 mV for ISE (-4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -17.0 mV Upper limit Upper limit value for the slope. tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 23.0 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -16.0 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 17.0 mV for ISE (-4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -12.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Lower limit Lower limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -2000.0 mV Upper limit Upper limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 2000.0 mV Cell constant monitoring (only for conductivity sensors) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a check will be made to see whether the value determined during the determination of the cell constant of a conductivity sensor is within the defined limits.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Slope, E(0) and c(blank value), and for conductivity sensors the cell constant. Slope, pH(0), E(0), c(blank), cell constant The values are shown in the following colors: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ Blue, when the values were determined automatically by a method. Black, when the values have been entered manually. Orange, when the values are outside the warning limits. Red, when the values are outside the intervention limits.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration If limits have been defined then the warning limits will be shown in orange and the intervention limits in red. Note The history graph can be copied into the clipboard by using the contextsensitive menu item Copy. [Limits] Opens the dialog window Limits for sensor in which the warning and intervention limits for the calibration data can be defined. These limits only apply to the graph, no monitoring will take place during calibration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Warning limits for slope (only for pH and ISE electrodes) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the values for the slope will be shown in orange if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower warning limit for the slope. 1326 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 97.5 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 57.2 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -61.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Upper limit Upper warning limit for the slope. for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 102.5 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 61.2 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -57.2 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 31.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -27.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 21.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Lower limit Lower intervention limit for the slope. for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 95 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 55 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -62.4 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 26.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -32.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 16.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 62.4 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -55.0 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 32.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -26.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 22.7 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -16.7 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 7,500 Intervention limits for pH(0) (only for pH electrodes) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the values for pH(0) will be shown in red if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower intervention limit for pH(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 6.000 Upper limit Upper intervention limit for pH(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 8.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -30 mV Upper limit Upper intervention limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 30 mV Warning limits for cell constant (only for conductivity sensors) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled then the values for the cell constant will be shown in orange if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower warning limit for the cell constant. Range Default value 0.001 ... 500 /cm 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Subwindow Common variables 6.8 Subwindow Common variables 6.8.1 Configuration - Common variables Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Common Variables Common variables subwindow The subwindow Common variables contains the table with the configured common variables. It can be shown in the program part Configuration as a part of the Configuration view or (if not present on the desktop) in a separate window with View ▶ Quick access.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Unit Unit of the common variables. Assignment date Date of the last value assignment for the common variable. Assignment method Name of the method used to assign the value. User Short name of the user logged in during value assignment. Next assignment Date on which the next value assignment is to be carried out. If monitoring the common variable is switched on and the set date is before the current date (i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Subwindow Common variables New… Adds new common variable manually (see Chapter 6.8.2.2, page 1334). Delete Deletes the selected common variable (see Chapter 6.8.2.3, page 1334). Properties… Edits the selected common variable (see Chapter 6.8.3.1, page 1335). Column display… Defines the columns of the table of Common variables (see Chapter 6.8.2.4, page 1334). Print (PDF)… Outputs the table of common variables as a PDF file (see Chapter 6.8.2.5, page 1335). 6.8.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Removes the selected column from the table. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column down. 6.8.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Subwindow Common variables 6.8.3.2 Properties - Common variable Tab: Configuration ▶ Common variables ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Common variable - 'Name' ▶ Common variable Name Name of common variable. Input 50 characters Type Selection of the type for a new common variable. For existing common variables the type will only be shown; it cannot be edited. Selection Default value Number | Text | Date/Time Number Value Value of common variables.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 256 characters Input Assignment date Date and time at which the last value was assigned; this is entered automatically each time that a value is assigned automatically or manually. Note In contrast to automatic value assignment, when assigning the value manually the date is only entered if the value has really been changed. Assignment method Name of the method with which the last value assignment was carried out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Subwindow Common variables Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-mail] opens the Send E-mail window.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Value The values are shown in the following colors: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ Blue, if the value has been assigned automatically by a method. Black, when the values have been entered manually. Orange, when the values are outside the warning limits. Red, when the values are outside the intervention limits. If the warning or intervention limits are exceeded then the line number will also be shown with an orange and red background respectively.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Subwindow Common variables 6.8.3.4 History - Limits Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Common variables ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Common variable - 'Name' ▶ History ▶ [Limit value] ▶ Limits for Common variable - 'Name' In the dialog window Limits for Common variable both warning and intervention limits can be defined for the values of the common variables. If you have defined limits then these will be shown in the graph in orange for warning limits and red for intervention limits.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6.9 Subwindow Global variables 6.9.1 Configuration - Global variables Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Global variables Subwindow Global variables The subwindow Global variables contains the table with the configured global variables. It can be shown in the program part Configuration as a part of the Configuration view or (if not present on the desktop) in a separate window with View ▶ Quick access.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Subwindow Global variables Unit Unit of global variable. Assignment date Date of the last value assignment to global variable. Assignment method Name of the method used to assign the value. User Short name of the user logged in during value assignment. Client name Name of the client (computer name) on which the value assignment has taken place. Next assignment Date on which the next value assignment is to be carried out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Functions The menu [Edit] beneath the table of global variables contains the following menu items: New… Adds new global variable manually (see Chapter 6.9.2.2, page 1343). Delete Deletes the selected global variable (see Chapter 6.9.2.3, page 1343). Properties… Edits the selected global variable (see Chapter 6.9.3, page 1344). Column display… Defines the columns of the table of global variables (see Chapter 6.9.2.4, page 1343).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Subwindow Global variables Adds the selected column to the table. Removes the selected column from the table. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column down. 6.9.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9.3.2 6 Configuration Properties - Global variable Tab: Configuration ▶ Global variables ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Global variable 'Name' ▶ Global variable Name Name of global variable. Input 50 characters Type Selection of the type for a new global variable. For existing global variables the type will only be shown; it cannot be edited. Selection Default value Number | Text | Date/Time Number Value Value of the global variable.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Subwindow Global variables 256 characters Input Assignment date Date and time at which the last value was assigned; this is entered automatically each time that a value is assigned automatically or manually. Note In contrast to automatic value assignment, when assigning the value manually the date is only entered if the value has really been changed. Assignment method Name of the method with which the last value assignment was carried out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email...] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail...] [E-Mail] opens the Send E-mail window.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Subwindow Global variables Value The values are shown in the following colors: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ Blue, if the value has been assigned automatically by a method. Black, when the values have been entered manually. Orange, when the values are outside the warning limits. Red, when the values are outside the intervention limits. If the warning or intervention limits are exceeded then the line number will also be shown with an orange and red background respectively.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9.3.4 6 Configuration History - Limits Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Global variable ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Global variable - 'Name' ▶ History ▶ [Limit value] ▶ Limits for Global variable - 'Name' In the dialog window Limits for global variable both warning and intervention limits can be defined for the values of the global variables. If you have defined limits then these will be shown in the graph in orange for warning limits and red for intervention limits.
6.10 Subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity) ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity) 6.10.1 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) - General Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Sample solutions (TC conductivity) Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow In the subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity), the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficients of a sample solution is displayed in tabular form via Chebyshev function.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration c0 ... c4 Coefficients of the Chebyshev polynomial for the calculation of the function. Assignment date Point in time at which the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficient was entered or determined. Assignment method Name of the method with which the automatic value assignment took place. If the value has been entered manually then manual will be shown.
6.10 Subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity) ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ If the contents of a field is larger than the column width then the whole contents will be shown as a tooltip if the mouse cursor is kept on the field. Functions The menu [Edit] beneath the table contains the following menu items: New… Adds a new column manually (see Chapter 6.10.2.2, page 1352) . Delete Deletes the selected line (see Chapter 6.10.2.3, page 1352). Properties… Edits the selected line (see Chapter 6.6.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Removes the selected column from the table. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column down. 6.10.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity) 6.10.3.2 Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Sample solutions (TC conductivity) ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Sample solution (TC conductivity) ▶ General Name Name of the measurement solution for which the temperature coefficient was determined for conductivity. Input Default value 50 characters 'empty' Comment Comments on the solution to be measured. Input Default value 6.10.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration c0 ... c4 Coefficients of the Chebyshev polynomial for the calculation of the function. Range Default value 1E-08 ... 1E+08 0.0 Assignment date Display of the point in time at which the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficient was entered or determined. This value is entered automatically by tiamo. Assignment method Name of the method with which the automatic value assignment took place.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity) Selection Date selection Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] Pressing [E-mail] opens the Send E-mail (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86) window.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6.11 Subwindow Rack data 6.11.1 Configuration - Rack data Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Rack data Rack data subwindow The subwindow Rack data contains the Rack table with all the sample racks for Metrohm sample changers defined for the client. It can be shown in a separate window in the program part Configuration as a part of the Configuration view or (if not present on the desktop) with View ▶ Quick access.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.11 Subwindow Rack data Table view The rack table cannot be edited directly. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Rack name Name for the new rack. The selected name must not already exist. Input 25 characters Rack code Code of the new rack. The selected rack code must not already exist. Input 6.11.2.3 6-figure binary pattern made up of 0 and 1 Deleting rack Menu item: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete With [Edit] ▶ Delete the rack selected in the rack list will be deleted. 6.11.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.11 Subwindow Rack data in by the Sample Processor in order to recognize the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. The parameters for the rack in position are defined in the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 6.11.3.2 Rack parameters Defines the parameters that are valid for all rack positions.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Rack offset The rack offset is a production-dependent tolerance value between the upper part of the rack and the lower part. The value is determined by a rack adjustment and displayed here. If necessary, it can be edited. Range 6.11.3.3 -5.00 ... 5.00 ° Properties - Lift positions Tab: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Rack data ▶ Lift positions Tower 1 Defines the lift positions for Tower 1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.11 Subwindow Rack data 0 ... 235 mm Range Rinse position Rinse position for Lift 2. This lift position is used for rinsing the electrodes. 0 ... 235 mm Range Shift position Shift position for Lift 2. Each time that the rack shifts, the lift will move to this position if it is located at a lower lift position. If the lift is located at a higher lift position than that defined here, then the shifting will take place at the current lift position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Work position Tower 1 Work position for the special beaker at Tower 1. Work position Tower 2 Work position for the special beaker at Tower 2. Beaker radius Radius of the special beaker. Beaker sensor Shows whether and which beaker sensor is to be used for the special beaker. [Edit] Opens the dialog window Special beaker # (see Chapter 6.11.3.5, page 1363) for editing the data of the selected special beaker. 6.11.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.11 Subwindow Rack data Beaker radius Radius of the selected special beaker on the rack. If the lift is moved to the work position then this value will be compared with the parameter Min. beaker radius (see Chapter 7.10.3, page 1417) that can be specifically defined for each tower. If Beaker radius samples < min. beaker radius then a corresponding error message will appear. With off the beaker radius will not be checked. Range Selection 1.0 ... 100.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ ￭ 6.11.3.7 6 Configuration Special beakers Display of the special beaker for the rack in position. Properties - Lift positions (774) Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ Properties Tower 1 Defines the lift positions for Tower 1. These apply for all rack positions except those that are defined as (see Chapter 6.11.3.8, page 1365). Work position Work position for Lift 1. At this lift position the electrodes, stirrer and buret tips are optimally positioned for work. Range 0 .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando 7 Devices 7.1 Titrando 7.1.1 Titrando - Overview The parameters for the 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 851, 852, 857, 859, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906 and 907 Titrando are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. Note 2.xxx.0010 Titrando models only have one measuring input.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando Measuring input 1/2 (iConnect) ADC type Shows the type of analog-digital converter. Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring input interface. Temperature sensor Selects the type of temperature sensor connected to the measuring input. With the 856 Conductivity Module displayed only. Selection Pt 1000 | NTC Default value Pt 1000 R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices At program start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each program start the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. On attaching an exchange/dosing unit on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each attaching of an exchange or dosing unit the request to prepare the dosing device will appear.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando 7.1.5 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Old version Shows the old device program version. New version Shows the new device program version to be loaded. [Load] Loads new program version. Note Make sure that the device is not manipulated or switched off during the loading process and follow the instructions shown. 7.2 Titrino 7.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2.2 7 Devices Titrino Program version 702 SM Titrino 5.702.0021 716 DMS Titrino 5.716.0022 718 STAT Titrino 5.718.0012 719 S Titrino 5.719.0021 720 KFS Titrino 5.720.0021 721 NET Titrino 5.721.0012 736 GP Titrino 5.736.0013 751 GPD Titrino 5.751.0021 758 KFD Titrino 5.758.0022 784 KFP Titrino 5.784.0011 785 DMP Titrino 5.785.0011 794 Basic Titrino 5.794.0010 795 KFT Titrino 5.795.0010 798 MPT Titrino 5.798.0010 799 GPT Titrino 5.799.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices At program start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each program start the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. On attaching an exchange/dosing unit on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each attaching of an exchange or dosing unit the request to prepare the dosing device will appear.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Time interval on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the request to prepare the dosing device will appear after the time interval defined here. all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Here the device (685 or 700) connected to the dosing device connector is displayed with its properties. Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.2.6 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.3 756/831 Coulometer 7.3.1 756/831 Coulometer - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 756 and 831 Coulometers are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.3.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the Coulometer is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.3 756/831 Coulometer Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.3.4 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.3 756/831 Coulometer Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.4 712 Conductometer 7.4.1 712 Conductometer - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 712 Conductometer are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.4.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the Coulometer is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.4 712 Conductometer Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.4.4 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.4 712 Conductometer Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.5 856 Conductivity Module 7.5.1 856 Conductivity Module - Device Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 856 Conductivity Module are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.5.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. MSB # Properties of the MSB connector 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.5 856 Conductivity Module Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 99999 Ohm Default value 30000 Ohm B value Material constant of the NTC resistance referred to measuring the resistance at 25 °C and 50 °C. Only visible for temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 9999 Default value 4100 7.5.4 Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.5 856 Conductivity Module all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6.2 7 Devices Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module 7.6.3 Properties - Measuring inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Measuring inputs On the tab Measuring inputs the properties of the measuring inputs used on the device are displayed. For each measuring input a group of parameters is displayed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6.4 7 Devices Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ MSB # On the tabs MSB # the properties of the connector and the devices connected to are displayed. Request for dosing device preparation Selection when the request for carrying out the command PREP (see Chapter 5.6.6.5.1, page 1108) (prepare) is to be shown for the dosing device connected to the MSB.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.6.5 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 2.5.1, page 83). After the date has been entered, the field GLP test interval will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.7 846 Dosing Interface 7.7 846 Dosing Interface 7.7.1 846 Dosing Interface - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 846 Dosing Interface are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.7.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. (see Chapter 7.1.4, page 1368) Properties of the MSB connector and the peripheral devices connected to.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.7.3 1000 characters empty Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.7 846 Dosing Interface all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭ 7.8.2 GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring. Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Input Default value 7.8.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Towers Note This tab is only displayed if a PC and a sample changer are connected via an RS-232 interface. On the tab Towers the tower parameters for Tower 1 and Tower 2 (if present) are shown for the 730 Sample Changer.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8.4 7 Devices Properties - Rack Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Rack On the tab Rack the rack-specific data of the attached rack are shown. Rack name Shows the name of the rack attached. If no rack is in position then "-----" is shown. Rack code Shows the rack code of the rack attached.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Note Connecting the dosing devices is described in the manual for the 730 Sample Changer or 774 Oven Sample Processor. If no dosing device is connected then the tab will remain empty. 7.8.6 Properties - RS-232 Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ RS-232 COM Port Selection of the serial interface on the PC to which the device is connected.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test. Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor Acoustic signal on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, an acoustic signal will be emitted additionally to the message defined above Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.9.2 Dosing device Properties of the connector and the dosing devices connected to. This tab is only displayed if the Oven Sample Processor is connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface. Oven Shows the oven parameters. This tab is only displayed if the Oven Sample Processor is connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface. Gas Shows the parameters for the gas flow.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.9.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Rack code Shows the rack code of the rack attached. The rack code corresponds to the arrangement of magnets on the base of the rack and is read in by the Sample Processor in order to recognize the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Shift rate Sample rack speed of rotation for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor 7.9.6 Properties - Oven Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Oven On the tab Oven the oven parameters are set: Oven program version Shows the program version of the oven module. Display for the 874 Oven Sample Processor only. Oven serial number Shows the serial number of the oven module. Display for the 874 Oven Sample Processor only.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9.7 7 Devices Properties - Gas Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Gas On the tab Gas the parameters for the gas flow on the 774 Oven Sample Processor are shown. The parameters cannot be edited, they are only read off by the device. Unit for gas flow Shows the unit selected at the device for the gas flow display (mL/min or L/h). Minimum gas flow Shows the lower warning limit set on the device for the gas flow.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor [Disconnect] Disconnects the connection to the RS-232 device. Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.9.9 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor 7.10.1 778/789 Sample Processor - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the devices 778 Sample Processor and 789 Robotic Sample Processor XL are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.10.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor tions(see Chapter 6.11.3.2, page 1360) and Special beakers(see Chapter 6.11.3.4, page 1362) will be compared with the Min. beaker radius. If this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear. With off no check will be made. Selection Default value 1.0 … 100.0 mm | off off Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1431) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.11.3.1, page 1359) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.11.3.6, page 1364) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.10.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.10.7 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor 7.11.1 814/815 USB Sample Processor - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the devices 814 USB Sample Processor and 815 Robotic USB Sample Processor XL are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.11.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear. With off no check will be made. Selection Default value 1.0 … 100.0 mm | off off Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s Axial distance Distance between the axis of rotation of the sample rack and swing axis of the robotic arm. Range 100.0 ... 300.0 mm 814 USB Sample Processor XL Selection 166.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1431) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.11.3.1, page 1359) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.11.3.6, page 1364) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.11.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.11.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.11.7 Configuration Robotic arm Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor Range Default value -270.0 ... 270.0 ° 0.0 ° Swing direction The swing direction of the robotic arm depends on the type of robotic arm. For a 2-tower model, the robotic arm at Tower 1 must swing to the right, i.e. – and that at Tower 2 must be mounted + so that it swings to the left. Selection Default value +|– + + Clockwise rotation. – Counterclockwise rotation. 7.11.8 External position Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler 7.12.1 855 Robotic Titrosampler - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the device 855 Robotic Titrosampler are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.12.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. MSB # Properties of the MSB connector 1...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices With the 856 Conductivity Module displayed only. Selection Pt 1000 | NTC Default value Pt 1000 R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 99999 Ohm Default value 30000 Ohm B value Material constant of the NTC resistance referred to measuring the resistance at 25 °C and 50 °C. Only visible for temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 9999 Default value 4100 7.12.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s Axial distance Distance between the axis of rotation of the sample rack and swing axis of the robotic arm. Range 100.0 ... 300.0 mm 814 USB Sample Processor XL Selection 166.0 mm Default value 166.0 mm 815 Robotic USB Sample Processor XL, 855 Robotic Titrosampler, 864 Balance Sample Processor Selection 196.0 mm Default value 196.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position. [Edit] Opens the dialog window External position # (see Chapter 7.11.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.11.3.1, page 1359) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.11.3.6, page 1364) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.12.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.12.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor 7.13.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Min. beaker radius Definition of the minimum radius which the beakers used on the rack must have. If the lift is moved to the work position the beaker radii defined in Rack table(see Chapter 6.11.2.1, page 1357) for general Sample positions(see Chapter 6.11.3.2, page 1360) and Special beakers(see Chapter 6.11.3.4, page 1362) will be compared with the Min. beaker radius. If this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Rinse position Rinse position valid for all 4 external positions. Range Default value 0 ... 235 mm 0 mm [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1431) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Shift rate Sample rack speed of rotation for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.11.3.1, page 1359) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.11.3.6, page 1364) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Time interval on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the request to prepare the dosing device will appear after the time interval defined here. all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14.2 7 Devices Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor 7.14.3 Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Tower On the tab Tower the tower parameters for the tower on the 874 Oven Sample Processor are edited. Max. stroke path Entry of the lowest permitted lift position for the tower. A lift height of 0 mm corresponds to the "Home position", i.e. the lift is moved right to the top. Range Default value 0 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.11.3.1, page 1359) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.11.3.6, page 1364) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.14.5 Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display of the initial temperature set on the device only. Range 50 ... 250 °C Default value off °C Max. temperature With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display of the maximum temperature set on the device only. With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display only. Range 50 ... 250 °C Default value 250 °C Temperature correction Enter the temperature correction.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Selection Default value continuous | pulsed continuous Pulses per integration time Frequency the light flashes with. This parameter can only be edited for the Type = pulsed. Range Default value 0 ... 1000 10 Analog output Analog output on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the measured signal on the analog output of the spectrometer is put out. If the connected spectrometer has no analog output, this option is ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer 7.15.5 Properties - Calibration Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Calibration On the tab Calibration the data of the wavelength calibration is displayed. A specific wavelength, defined by four wavelength coefficients, is assigned to each pixel on the detector.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Date Display of date and time the dark spectrum has been recorded. User Display of the user logged in during recording of the dark spectrum. Method Display of the method the dark spectrum has been recorded with. Determination ID ID of the determination the dark spectrum has been recorded in. Integration time Display of the integration time at recording the dark spectrum. Averaged spectra Number of spectra recorded and averaged.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer User Display of the user logged in during recording of the reference spectrum. Method Display of the method the reference spectrum has been recorded with. Determination ID ID of the determination the reference spectrum has been recorded in. Integration time Display of the integration time at recording the dark spectrum. Averaged spectra Number of spectra recorded and averaged.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1371). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Selection Default value COM1 | COM2 | … | COMn COMn COMn First free COM port. Baud rate Transmission rate. The baud rate selected here must also be set on the device itself. Selection Default value 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 9600 Data bit Number of data bits. Selection Default value 7|8 8 Parity Type of parity testing. Selection Default value None | Odd | Even None Stop bit Number of stop bits.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Selection Default value \0D | \0D\0A | \0D\0A\0A | \0D\0D\0A \0D\0A (\0D = CR, \0A = LF) Terminator for receiving Final character for receiving in hexadecimal code. Selection Default value \0D | \0D\0A | \0D\0A\0A | \0D\0D\0A \0D\0A (\0D = CR, \0A = LF) Code page Code page used for the data transfer.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances 7.17 Balances 7.17.1 Balance - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for a balance are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.17.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the device is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.17.3 1000 characters empty Properties - RS-232 Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances Selection Default value None | Odd | Even None Stop bit Number of stop bits. Selection Default value 1|2 1 Handshake Type of data transmission protocol. Selection Default value None | HW | SW None [Connect] Establishes the connection to the balance. The dialog window Establish connection appears (see Chapter 7.17.5, page 1472). [Disconnect] Disconnects the connection to the balance (only then the device can be deleted out of the configuration). 7.17.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.17.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.18 Barcode reader 7.18.1 Barcode reader - General A barcode reader is used to enter sample and other data in tiamo. Note A barcode reader only needs to be configured as a device in tiamo if the functions for automatic data import into sample tables are to be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.18 Barcode reader 7.18.2 Barcode reader - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for a barcode reader are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.18.3 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Settings Settings for the barcode reader. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.18.4 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Settings Barcode reader ID Shows the identification of the barcode reader.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.18 Barcode reader Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller 7.19 IO controller 7.19.1 IO controller - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The properties of an IO controller are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.19.2 (see Chapter 7.19.2, page 1478) General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. (see Chapter 7.19.3, page 1479) General settings for the IO controller. (see Chapter 7.19.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Device serial number Display of the serial number of the device. Set to work Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.19.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Settings On the tab Settings the IP address of the controller and the controller ID are entered.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller 7.19.4 Properties - Digital inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Digital inputs On the registration card Digital inputs all inputs detected are automatically listed in a table. For each digital input the port description can be modified. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Port description Display of the port description. Type Display of the port type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input Default value 50 characters DigIn_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Note The first digital input is connected to the the emergency switch on the wet end. With pressed switch all modules connected to the controller are set to their default status and do not react to other control commands. The first digital input should therefore be called Emergency_Module.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Assigned output Selection of an output port assigned to an input port. The signal of the output port depends on the signal of the input port. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector. Selection All digital outputs Note Digital outputs of the Type = Alarm signal cannot be selected. Signal Select which value the signal on the output port should take. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action Only active and editable for the Port type = Level detector. If the fill level is too low and the level detector is therefore active, one of the following actions will automatically be carried out at the start test: Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the level detector on the device is active will automatically be saved in the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Parameter 2 The meaning of Parameter 2 depends on the Type set. [Edit] Opens the dialog Properties Digital output in order to edit the selected port. [Port description] Opens a menu in order to import or export port descriptions. The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note Additionally a stepping motor can have a port of the Type = Brake. The port information for this port type is automatically read out of the stepping motor controller. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting tiamo. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 7.19.6 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - Analog inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored. Export Export a text file containing the port descriptions of all digital inputs. 7.19.6.1 Properties Analog input Dialog window Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Note With the aid of the following parameters the physical values that are adjacent to the analog input can be mapped to any measured value. The transfer function is linear. 0% Mapping Measured value to be used when the Low level (0%) is adjacent as input value. Range Default value -214783648 ... 214783647 0 100% Mapping Measured value to be used when the High level (100%) is adjacent as input value. Range Default value -214783648 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices High level (100%) Display of the highest analog output value with unit. 0% Mapping Measured value to be used when the Low level (0%) is adjacent as output value, with unit. 100% Mapping Measured value to be used when the High level (100%) is adjacent as output value, with unit. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting the program. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Input Default value 50 characters AnOut_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Type Display of the port type. Low level (0%) Display of the lowest analog output value. This value is read out automatically and depends on the Type. High level (100%) Display of the highest analog output value. This value is read out automatically and depends on the Type. Unit Display of the unit of the analog output value.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting the program. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method. Lastly used value on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled the lastly set value is used as default value on the analog output. Enter the default value. Range Default value 7.19.8 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties..
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). After the date has been entered, the field GLP test interval will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.1 Stepping motor controller - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The properties of a stepping motor controller are set on the following tabs: ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 7.20.2 (see Chapter 7.19.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller AdsDll version Display of the version of AdsDll.dll. Device serial number Display of the serial number of the device. Set to work Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.20.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20.4 7 Devices Properties - Digital inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Digital inputs On the registration card Digital inputs all inputs detected are automatically listed in a table. For each digital input the port description can be modified. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Port description Display of the port description. Type Display of the port type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Input Default value 50 characters DigIn_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Note The first digital input is connected to the the emergency switch on the wet end. With pressed switch all modules connected to the controller are set to their default status and do not react to other control commands. The first digital input should therefore be called Emergency_Module.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Assigned output Selection of an output port assigned to an input port. The signal of the output port depends on the signal of the input port. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector. Selection All digital outputs Note Digital outputs of the Type = Alarm signal cannot be selected. Signal Select which value the signal on the output port should take. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Action Only active and editable for the Port type = Level detector. If the fill level is too low and the level detector is therefore active, one of the following actions will automatically be carried out at the start test: Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the level detector on the device is active will automatically be saved in the determination.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Parameter 2 The meaning of Parameter 2 depends on the Type set. [Edit] Opens the dialog Properties Digital output in order to edit the selected port. [Port description] Opens a menu in order to import or export port descriptions. The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Note Additionally a stepping motor can have a port of the Type = Brake. The port information for this port type is automatically read out of the stepping motor controller. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting tiamo. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 7.20.6 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - Stepping motors Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.6.1 Properties Stepping motor Dialog window Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' ▶ Stepping motors ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties Stepping motor In the dialog window Properties Stepping motor the properties for the individual stepping motors are set.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Reset A reset is carried out on the terminal the motor is connected to. While doing so, the LEDs of the terminal will shortly flash, afterwards it could be necessary to reference anew. Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 mm 0 mm Angle The angle to be moved to. Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.7 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 83). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 86).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.1 Manual Control - General 8 Manual Control 8.1 Manual Control - General Program part: Manual Control Definition In tiamo, Manual Control refers to the program part in which the connected devices can be directly actuated, i.e. without a predefined execution specification. The precondition for this is that the devices are switched on and detected by tiamo. The Manual control is also possible live when running a method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.3 8 Manual Control Manual Control - Device selection Program part: Manual Control In the subwindow for the device selection, the devices or function units of devices can be selected, on which the functions are to be triggered manually. Therefore they are displayed in tree-form. Displayed are all devices configured in the device table with status "ok", device name and (in brackets) the device type number. The currently selected device is shown with a blue background.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrino: 702, 716, 718, 719, 720, 721, 736, 751, 758, 785, 784, 785, 794, 795, 798, 799 Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 857, 859, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906, 907 Dosing Interface: 846 Conductometer: 856 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample changer: 730, 774, 778, 789, 814, 815, 864, 874 Robitic Titrosampler: 855 8.4.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Titer Display of the titer of the solution put on. This field only appears for intelligent exchange/dosing units or if the solution for non-intelligent exchange/ dosing units has been selected. 8.4.1.3 Dosing - Prepare Program part: Manual Control Here the preparing of exchange/dosing units can be started and stopped. This tab appears when selecting a single dosing device as well as with all dosing devices.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.1.5 Dosing - Empty Program part: Manual Control Here the emptying of dosing units can be started and stopped. This tab appears when selecting a single dosing device as well as with all dosing devices with dosing units. Note This tab is not displayed for external dosing devices on the Titrinos 736, 751, 758, 799. [Start] Start emptying for the selected dosing device(s). The parameters defined for the dosing units will be used.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control 730, 774, 778, 789 Range 0.01 ... 160.00 mL/min Titrino Range 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min Filling rate The buret is filled at this rate after the dosing. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. If the entered filling rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Note For viscous liquids the filling rate should be reduced.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Note Parameters modified after the start of the dosing are not valid until the next dosing procedure. [Fill] Start filling of the buret for the selected dosing device. This button is only available if Fill automatically is disabled. During the filling procedure, the volume display is set to 0.0000 mL. [Stop] Stop fixed volume dosing for the selected dosing device. If the dosing has been stopped, it cannot be continued. 8.4.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Note For viscous liquids the filling rate should be reduced. Selection Default value maximum maximum Titrando, 814, 815, 855 Range 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 778, 789 Range 0.01 ... 160.00 mL/min [Dosing] Start manual dosing for the selected dosing device. Dosing will take place as long as the button is pressed down. The dosed volume is displayed live. Note Parameters modified after the start of the dosing are not valid until the next dosing procedure.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrino: 751, 758, 785, 784, 785, 794, 795, 798, 799 Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 857, 859, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906, 907 Dosing Interface: 846 Conductometer: 856 Coulometer: 756, 831 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample changer: 730, 774, 778, 789, 814, 815, 864, 874 Robitic Titrosampler: 855 8.4.2.2 Stirring - Switch on/off Program part: Manual Control Here stirrers can be switched on and off.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [Start] Start continuous operation for the selected stirrer. In the status display the remaining time is shown. The stirrer will be switched off automatically after the stirring time has elapsed [Stop] Stop stirring for the selected stirrer. 8.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Output signal Current status Displays the current status of the 14 output lines. Templates/Input Input of the binary pattern for the output signal or selecting a predefined signal pattern. It is possible to enter the following characters: 0 = line inactive 1 = line active * = any line status p = set pulse (pulse length = 200 ms. If a pulse of another length should be put out, a corresponding template has to be defined.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Note We recommend masking the irrelevant output lines with an asterisk * so as not to modify these line conditions. Note For Titrinos with 3 output lines, only 3 characters can be entered. If signal pattern is selected, also only the first 3 characters will be used. [Set] Set the bit pattern defined under Outputs. 8.4.4 8.4.4.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Rack code Shows the number of positions on the rack attached. If no rack is attached, -------- is displayed. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack attached. If no rack is attached, -------- is displayed. Shift rate Shift rate for manual control of the sample changer. Range Default value 5 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s Lift rate Lift rate for manual control on the selected tower. 730, 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864 Range 5 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4.4.3 8 Manual Control Sample changer - Move Program part: Manual Control Here the moving to desired rack, lift or robotic arm position can be triggered manually. Rack position Set rack position. Current position Shows the current rack position. Target position Select or enter the rack position to be moved to. Range Default value 1 ... n (depending on rack) 1 Selection Special beaker 1...16 [Start] Start moving to target position.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Shift position For normal beakers and external positions only. Rinse position For normal beakers and external positions only. Special position For normal beakers and external positions only. [Start] Start moving to target position. Start moving to target position. After the start, the button changes to [Stop], the two lower buttons are shown as inactive (gray) and Move... instead of Ready is displayed as status message.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4.4.4 8 Manual Control Sample changer - Assign position Program part: Manual Control Here the current rack, lift or robotic arm position can be assigned to a specific special position. Rack position Assign current rack position to a specific special beaker. Current position Shows the current rack position. Special beaker Select the special beaker to be assigned to the current rack position. Range Default value 1 ... 16 1 [Assign] Trigger assignment.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions all except 730 Selection Default value Tower 1 | Tower 2 | External position Tower 1 730 only Selection Default value Tower 1+2 | External position Tower 1+2 Shift position for If this option is selected, the current lift position is assigned to the shift position of the tower.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [Assign] Trigger assignment. During the assignment the cursor is displayed as hourglass. Assign robotic arm position Assign current rack position to a specific external robotic arm position. Current position Displays the current position of the robotic arm in °. External position Select the external position to which the current robotic arm position is to be assigned. Range Default value 1 ... 4 1 [Assign] Trigger assignment.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions [Stop] Stop pump 1. Pump 2 Manually control pump 2 or valve 2 on the selected tower. Operation Select whether the pump or valve should be switched on/off manually or whether they should be switched on for a defined time and then automatically be switched off. Selection Default value On/Off | Duration On/Off Duration Enter the duration during which the pump/valve should remain switched on. This field only appears for Operation = Duration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Range Selection Default value 1 ... 999 min off off [Start] Start heater. In the status display the current temperature is shown. [Stop] Stop heater. Gas flow Inlet Select the inlet of the carrier gas. Selection Default value Pump | Valve Pump Pump Use of ambient air as carrier gas. Valve Use of gas out of a compressed gas cylinder. Flow rate 874 Range Default value 10 ... 150 mL/min 50 mL/min Gas type Gas type of the carrier gas.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Gas flow pump Switch the gas flow pump on the Oven Sample Processor on/off. [Start] Switch on gas flow pump. In the status display the running time since start is shown. [Stop] Switch off gas flow pump. Inert gas valve Switch the inert gas valve on the Oven Sample Processor on/off. [Start] Switch on inert gas valve. In the status display the running time since start is shown. [Stop] Switch off inert gas valve. 8.4.5 8.4.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Robotic Titrosampler : 855 Spectrometer: Avantes 8.4.5.2 Measure - Measure Program part: Manual Control Here the measuring can be started and stopped. Measured quantity The selectable measured quantities depend on the device whose measuring input has been selected in the device selection. pH | U | Ipol | Upol | Temperature | Conc | Cond Selection Note Which other parameters are displayed depends on the selected measured quantity.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrando, 855 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.0 µA (Increment: 0.5) 5.0 µA Titrino Range Default value -127 ... 127 µA (Increment: 1) 5 µA U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Temperature coefficient Range 0.00 ... 9.99 %/°C Sample solution Select name from the table Sample solution (TC conductivity). Selection Default value DIN | Entries of the table DIN [Start] Start measuring. [Stop] Stop measuring. 8.4.5.3 Measure - Intensity Program part: Manual Control Here the intensity of an uncorrected spectrum can be measured and displayed. Start wavelength Lower limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 400.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Range Default value 0 ... 100 Pixels 0 Pixels [Measuring] Start measuring of the intensity. The parameters defined will be used. 8.4.5.4 Measure - Sample spectrum Program part: Manual Control Here a sample spectrum can be measured and displayed. Note Before a sample spectrum can be measured, a reference spectrum has to be recorded in a determination by a spectrometer.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4.6.2 8 Manual Control Digital inputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.2.1 Digital inputs - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Digital inputs is selected, then the status of all connected digital inputs is shown in their physical order in the subwindow for the graphical display. Graphical display Example: 8.4.6.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Digital input Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR Graphical display Overview of the states of a digital input: ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR Display flashes. 8.4.6.3 Digital outputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Set default [Set] Resets all digital outputs to the default value in the configuration. Graphical display Example: tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.6.3.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control For Type = Stirrer: ￭ ￭ 0: Duration of the switch-on pulse fixed at 500 ms. >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Status Display of the current status.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions For Type = Stirrer: ￭ ￭ 0: Duration of the switch-on pulse fixed at 500 ms. >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value -214783647 ...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [Start] Sets the digital output to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets the digital output to INACTIVE. Set default Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [Set] Resets all digital outputs to the default value in the configuration.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Port type ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR Stirrer on Stirrer off Display flashes. Valve open Valve closed Display flashes. Stirrer Valve 8.4.6.4 Analog inputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.4.1 Analog inputs - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Analog inputs is selected, then the adjacent value for all connected analog inputs in their physical order is shown in the subwindow for the graphical display.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Analog input Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Mapping Display of the mapped value range. Current value Display of the adjacent value. Graphical display 8.4.6.5 Analog outputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Range Default value 0.0 ... 100.0 % Mapping 0.0 % Mapping [Set] Sets all analog outputs to the mapping value indicated. Set default [Set] Resets all analog outputs to the default value in the configuration. Graphical display Example: 8.4.6.5.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Mapping Display of the mapped value range. Value Enter the value to be set on the analog output. Current value Display of the adjacent value. [Set] Sets the analog output to the mapping value indicated. Set default Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Graphical display 8.4.6.6 Stepping motors Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.6.1 Stepping motors - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Stepping motors is selected, all stepping motors can be commonly controlled in the subwindow functions/parameters. In the subwindow for the graphical display the status of all connected stepping motors is shown in their physical order.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4.6.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 ° 0° Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely. If this is not done after the maximum waiting time has expired, the status of the stepping motor will be set to ERROR. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 10 Selection Default value s | min s Status Display of the current status.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [<] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE and moves in negative direction as long as the button remains pressed or until an end position is reached. Absolute position On this tab an absolute position can be moved to. Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions [Start] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets the stepping motor to INACTIVE. Reference position On this tab the reference position of the stepping motor can be moved to. Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely. If this is not done after the maximum waiting time has expired, the status of the stepping motor will be set to ERROR. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 10 Selection Default value s | min s Status Display of the current status.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Reference position Brake Safety switch 1 Safety switch 2 Safety switch 3 Overview of the states of a stepping motor: 8.4.6.7 ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR Motor on Motor off Display flashes. Multi-port valve Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree a multi-port valve is selected, then the functions and parameters belonging to this element are displayed in the subwindow for functions/parameters.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Range Default value 1 ... 12 1 Shift direction Select the direction in which the valve moves to the target port. Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over ascending ascending The valve moves towards the target port in ascending direction. descending The valve moves towards the target port in descending direction. automatic The valve determines the shortest path to the target port on its own.
8.5 Manual Control - Graphical display 8.5 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Manual Control - Graphical display Program window:Manual control In the subwindow for the graphical display all running, manually triggered functions are displayed graphically. 1550 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9 How to proceed? 9.1 Audit Trail 9.1.1 Opening Audit Trail How to proceed? Note The Audit Trail Table can only be opened if the option Enable Audit Trail is switched on in Security settings under Audit Trail/Modifications. 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item Tools ▶ Audit Trail…. The dialog window Audit Trail opens. 3 If required, adjust the column display. 9.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.1 Audit Trail After this function has been selected, the field in which the cursor is located will have a yellow background when navigating in the Audit Trail table. 2 Double click on the desired field with the left-hand mouse key. The contents of the field selected in the table will be set as a filter condition and this filter will be applied directly to the table.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The dialog window Audit Trail opens. 3 If desired, filter Audit Trail table. 4 If desired, select Audit Trail entries to be exported. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Export Audit Trail opens. 6 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the export file in the field Save file as. 7 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Selected records). 8 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.1 Audit Trail 4 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the archive file in the field Save file as. 5 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Records until including date selection). 6 Click on [OK]. The entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be archived as a text file. Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to export, i.e. the Audit Trail entries are stored in text format.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 3 Archive desired Audit Trail entries. 4 With the menu item File ▶ Delete the dialog window Delete Audit Trail opens. 5 Under Selection, select the desired option (All archived records or Archived records until including date selection). 6 User 1: Enter User name and Password. 7 User 2: Enter User name and Password. 8 Click on [OK]. The archived entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be deleted. 9.2 Backup 9.2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup Backing up database manually 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens. 3 Select database. 4 Click on [Backup] in the dialog window Database manager. The dialog window Backup database 'Database name' is opened. 5 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 6 Select or enter the name for the Backup file.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 On the tab General enter a comment on the database in the field Comment. 5 On the tab Backup enable the check box Backup monitoring. 6 Enter Interval for backup monitoring or date for the next backup in the field Next backup. 7 Activate the Start backup automatically check box. 8 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 9 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup Note Existing databases cannot be overwritten, i.e. they must first be deleted so that the database can be recovered under its old name. 9.2.3 Backing up configuration data How to proceed? General The configuration data in tiamo is saved in the Configuration database.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note If the backup directory is on a network drive, the backup date should be added manually to the Backup name because the backup date information is not available when the directory is restored. 5 Click on [Start]. The manual backup is started and the configuration database is backed up to the selected directory. Backing up configuration data automatically 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup The dialog window Restore configuration data opens. 3 Select the directory in the Backup directory field in which the desired database was backed up. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired backup file in the Backup name list box. 5 Click on [Start]. The restoring of the configuration database is started. tiamo multi 1 Make sure that tiamo is closed on all clients connected to the server and on the server itself. 2 Start the file ConfigRestore.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 2 Click on the menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Manually. The dialog window Backup configuration data manually opens. 3 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired backup file in the Backup name list box. If an existing backup file is selected it will be overwritten. .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup Exporting methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 Select desired Method group. 4 Select desired methods. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Select directory for export opens. 6 Select the directory where the method should be exported to and click on [OK]. The selected methods are each exported as files named 'Method name'.mmet.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 3 Click on the menu item File ▶ Archive.... The dialog window Archive Audit Trail opens. 4 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the archive file in the field Save file as. 5 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Records until including date selection). 6 Click on [OK]. The entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be archived as a text file. Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to export, i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 9.3 Determinations 9.3.1 Starting single determination How to proceed? Single determination without statistics 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 In the Run subwindow, select the Single determination tab. 3 If desired, enter Determination parameters. 4 In the Method list box select the method to be used for carrying out the determination. The subwindow Method shows the method loaded.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note In order to calculate statistical calculations for results, the Statistics option must be enabled in the START command of the method and, in addition, the Statistics option must be enabled in the CALC command for each desired result. 5 Activate the Statistics check box. 6 If desired, modify number of single determinations. 7 Enter sample data. 8 Click on [Start]. The single determination will be started.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 5 If a method was loaded in which the option Statistics in the START command is enabled, disable the check box Statistics on the tab Determination series. 6 Click on [Start]. The first determination of a sample series will be started. The subwindow Method shows active tracks and commands, the subwindow Live display live curves, measured values and messages. Determination series with statistics 1 Select program part Workplace.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note If the method contains a DATABASE command, then it is mandatory that this command be executed in all statistically linked determinations. If this is not done, then the statistical results will be displayed incorrectly and the determinations cannot be reprocessed. 9.3.3 Search for determinations How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. Filtering can now be done via quick filter or special filter in the Determination overview window: Quick filter 1 Click on the symbol or on Filter ▶ Quick filter in the context menu.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 Click on [Save filter]. 5 Click on [Apply filter]. The table will be filtered. Using special filter 1 In the list box Filter, select the desired special filter. The table will be filtered. 9.3.5 Signing determination How to proceed? Selecting determination 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations Signature 1 Note Determinations can only be signed at level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization (see Chapter 6.2.1.2.3, page 1226). 1 Click on the symbol or menu item Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 1…. The window Signature Level 1 opens. If the selected determination can be signed, Signature possible is displayed in the field Info. 2 Enter or select User, Password, Reason and Comment. 3 Click on [Sign].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 2 Enter or select User, Password, Reason and Comment and click on [Sign]. The selected determination will be signed on level 2. Note Determinations that can be signed at level 2 are blocked, i.e. they can neither be reprocessed nor deleted. In order to be able to edit such determinations again the signatures at level 2 must first be deleted. 9.3.6 Export determinations How to proceed? Defining export template 1 Select program part Database.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. 5 Select desired determinations. Export determinations 1 Click on the menu item Determinations ▶ Export.... The window Export determinations opens. 2 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Selected records).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The window Import determinations opens. 6 Select desired determinations. 7 Click on [Open]. The selected determinations are imported into the open database. Note Exported determinations can only be imported in the file format *.mdet. 9.3.8 Deleting determinations How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations Note If the option Comment on modification of determinations in the Security settings is enabled, then the window Modification comment determination will appear before the modification is saved. 9.3.9 Make the determination version current How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3.10 9 How to proceed? Reprocessing determinations How to proceed? Note Determinations that have a signature at level 2 cannot be reprocessed. 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. 4 Select desired determinations. 5 Click on the symbol ess....
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. Note If a variable is modified, then with [Recalculate] all the selected determinations will be recalculated with the new value. If one variable is not modified then when several determinations are recalculated the original value of the variable will be used (i.e.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. 6 If desired, save the modified method with [Save as...] under the same name or under a new name. If the modified method is saved under the name of an existing method then all the earlier method versions will be deleted and a new version with the number 1 will be generated. 7 In the dialog window Reprocessing click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations If the determination is switched off then an asterisk (*) appears behind all result values in the table and the line is shown as inactive (gray); if it is switched on again then the asterisks will disappear. Note If the results of a determination are switched off, the statistics for these results will be switched off when this determination is recalculated, i.e. no data for the mean value and standard deviations will be shown.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 Modify curve evaluation manually. 5 Then close the window with [OK]. 6 Click on [Recalculate]. The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. 7 In the dialog window Reprocessing click on [OK]. Each determination that has been modified by reprocessing will be saved as a new version with a version number increased by +1 and the subwindow Reprocessing will be closed.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 6 Click on the menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Report.... The dialog window Report output opens. 7 Under Selection, select desired determinations. 8 Under Report type, select the option Original report or Report template. 9 Under Output target, enable the check box Printer and/or select PDF file. Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note A maximum of 4 databases can be opened, but only 2 can be displayed at the same time. Databases that are open at the time the program is ended will be automatically opened the next time the program is started. 5 Select desired determinations. 6 Click on menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview…. The dialog window Print determination overview (PDF) opens. 7 Under Selection, select desired determinations.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases Note Each determination database has to be backed up separately. Afterwards, it is recommended that all backed-up files be copied to an external directory or to a CD/DVD. 9.4.2 Open database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Closing all databases 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Close all…. All opened databases will be closed. 9.4.4 Create database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens. 3 Click on the menu item Edit ▶ New.... The dialog window New database opens. 4 Enter a name for the new database. 5 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases 9 On tab Monitoring, define monitoring of size and number of data sets. 9.4.5 Backing up database How to proceed? Backing up database manually 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The window Database manager opens. 3 Click on [Backup]. The window Backup database opens. 4 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 5 Select or enter the name for the Backup file.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 3 Select desired database. 4 Click on [Properties]. The dialog window Properties - Database - 'Database name' opens for editing the database properties. 5 On the tab General enter a comment on the database in the field Comment. 6 On the tab Backup enable the check box Backup monitoring. 7 Enter Interval for backup monitoring or date for the Next backup. 8 Activate the Start backup automatically check box.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases 6 Enter the name under Save as under which the database is to be restored. 7 Click on [Start]. The database restoring is started. Note Existing databases cannot be overwritten, i.e. they must first be deleted so that the database can be recovered under its old name. 9.4.7 Delete database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens. 3 Select desired database.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9.5 Configuration data 9.5.1 Configuration data in general The configuration data in tiamo is saved in the Configuration database. Under configuration data is to be understood all settings for devices, titrants/solutions, sensors, common variables and rack data applying to all methods; configuration data also includes Methods, Security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.1, page 1232), User administration (see Chapter 6.2.1.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.5 Configuration data 9.5.3 Importing configuration data How to proceed? 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the menu item Determinations ▶ Import.... The dialog window Open opens. 3 Select or enter a new name and directory for the import file MCFG. 4 Click on [Open]. The dialog window Import configuration data opens. 5 Select desired configuration data. Note Data that is not present in the export file cannot be selected. 6 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 Select or enter the name for the Backup file. If an existing backup file is selected it will be overwritten. Note If the backup directory is on a network drive, the backup date should be added manually to the Backup name because the backup date information is not available when the directory is restored. 5 Click on [Start]. The manual backup is started and the configuration database is backed up to the selected directory.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.5 Configuration data 2 Start the file ConfigRestore.exe in the program directory …\tiamo \bin. The dialog window Restore configuration data opens. 3 Select the directory in the Backup directory field in which the configuration database was backed up. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired Backup file. 5 Click on [Start]. The restoring of the configuration database is started.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9.6 Methods 9.6.1 Open method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open method opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 5 Click on [Open]. The selected method is opened in the main window in the place of a method that is already opened.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods Close all methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Close all…. All opened methods will be closed. A request to save the method as a new version will appear for each method having been modified. 9.6.3 Create method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ New.... The dialog window New method opens. 3 Select Empty method or a fixed Method template. 4 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 2 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 3 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 4 Click on [Save]. The selected method is saved under the desired method name in the selected method group as method version 1. If the check box Comment on modification of methods is activated in the Security settings, the window Modification comment method is displayed before the method is saved. 9.6.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods 9.6.6 Exporting method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Select directory for export opens. 6 Select the directory for the export files.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The dialog window Select files to import opens. 5 Select desired import files named as 'Method name'.mmet in the desired directory. 6 Click on [OK]. The selected methods are imported in the currently opened method group. 9.6.8 Sign methods How to proceed? Select method 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The window Method manager opens. 3 Select desired Method group. 4 Select desired method.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods The selected method will be signed on level 1. Note Methods can be signed more than once at level 1 and can also be edited and deleted. If the method is edited and saved again, a new version is created and all the signatures will be deleted i.e. the method must be signed again. Signature 2 Note Methods can only be signed at level 2 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization (see Chapter 6.2.1.2.3, page 1226).
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select desired method. 5 Click on [History]. The dialog window Method history showing a table with all versions of the selected method is opened. 6 Select desired method that is to be made current. 7 Click on Make [current]. The selected method version is set as the current method version.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods 9.6.11 Backup methods How to proceed? General Methods are stored in the configuration database and globally accessible for all clients. This means that in order to save methods the configuration data must be saved manually or automatically. A further possible way is to export the methods and then to save these files externally from tiamo. Manual configuration data backup 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Manually.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 3 Activate the Automatic backup check box. 4 Enter an interval for backup monitoring in the field Interval or a date for the next backup in the field Next backup. 5 In the field Backup directory select a directory for the backup. 6 Click on [OK]. The dialog window Backup configuration data automatically is closed. Exporting methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.7 Method groups 9.7 Method groups 9.7.1 Creating method group How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Method groups.... The dialog window Method groups opens. 3 Click on [New]. The dialog window Properties - Method group - New Group opens. 4 On the tab General in the field Name, enter a new name for the method group and in the field Comment enter a comment.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 Click on [Delete]. The selected method group is deleted. 5 Confirm deleting with [OK]. 9.8 Sample tables 9.8.1 Create sample table How to proceed? 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 Click on the symbol table ▶ New…. or the menu item Tools ▶ Sample The dialog window Sample table 'New sample table with an empty sample table opens. 3 Click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Properties.... The dialog window Properties - Sample table 'New sample table' opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.8 Sample tables 9 Repeat step 6 for each desired determination. 10 Click on [Close]. The dialog window Edit line - Sample table 'New sample table' is closed. 11 In the dialog window Sample table 'New sample table' click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Save as.... The dialog window Save sample table opens. 12 In the field Name enter the desired name. 13 Click on [Save]. The sample table will be saved under the name that was entered. 9.8.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9 Click on the menu item Edit ▶ Edit line in the dialog window Sample table. The dialog window Edit line opens. 10 Select Method from the desired method group, enter Sample data and click on [Apply]. The sample data entered will be applied in the respective line of the sample table. 11 Repeat step 8 for each desired determination. 12 Close the dialog window Edit line with [Close]. 13 In the dialog window Sample table click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Save as...
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.8 Sample tables 9.8.4 Edit working sample table How to proceed? 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 In subwindow Run, click on the Determination series tab. 3 If desired, load existing sample table into working sample table. 4 If desired, click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Properties... in the subwindow Run. The dialog window Properties - Determination series opens. 5 Define the properties for the determination series. 6 Click on [OK].
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 14 In the field Name enter a name. 15 Click on [Save]. The working sample table will be saved under the name entered as sample table. 9.9 Reports 9.9.1 Creating report template How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Note A database must be open in order to carry out subsequent steps. Click on the menu item Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ New ▶ Form report… or Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ New ▶ Tabular Report….
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports 9 Select desired module symbol on the Module bar and place it on the report template by creating a field with the left mouse button. The properties window for the corresponding module opens automatically. 10 Enter desired settings for the module. 11 Click on [OK]. The properties window is closed. 12 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each desired module. 13 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Save as.... The dialog window Save report template opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 7 Close the dialog window with [OK]. 8 In the program window Report template, click on the menu item Tools ▶ Options.... The dialog window Options for report templates opens. 9 Define desired settings for the report template. 10 Close the window with [OK]. Editing existing modules 1 Select the symbol on the module bar and double-click on the desired module in the report template. The properties window of the selected module opens automatically.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports 9.9.3 Printing determination report How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name. 10 In the dialog window Report output, click on [OK]. The reports of the selected determination are put out. 9.9.4 Printing determination overview How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports 8 Under Orientation, select the option Portrait format or Landscape format. 9 Click on [OK]. The determination overview is opened as PDF file. 1610 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Index Nummern/Symbole 21 CFR 11 ......... 16, 1232, 1233, 1238, 1239 712 Conductometer Overview ........................ 1383 Properties ....................... 1383 730 Sample Changer ............ 1402 Overview ........................ 1402 Properties ....................... 1402 774 Oven Sample Processor Overview ........................ 1408 Properties ....................... 1408 778/789 Sample Processor Devices ........................... 1416 External positions .........
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Overview ........................ 1474 Settings .......................... 1475 Beaker radius ..... 1365, 1417, 1425, 1435, 1442 Rack parameters ............. 1360 Rack table ...................... 1357 Special beaker ...... 1362, 1363 Beaker sensor ....................... 1365 Rack parameters ............. 1360 Rack table ...................... 1357 Special beaker ................ 1362 Beaker test ........................... 1117 BRC ........................................
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ CTRL .............................. 1158 DATABASE ..................... 1153 DET Ipol ........................... 492 DET pH ............................. 440 DET U ............................... 466 DET Upol .......................... 518 DIGITAL IN ..................... 1199 DIGITAL OUT .................. 1194 DOS pH .......................... 1072 DOS U ............................ 1087 EMPTY ........................... 1110 ERROR .............................. 436 EXIT ..........
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Connections Barcode reader ............... 1477 Cont key ................ 124, 139, 140 Control chart .......................... 330 Comment ......................... 244 Graphical parameters ....... 242 Limit values ...................... 243 Managing templates ......... 240 Print ................................. 333 Properties ......................... 241 Show ............................... 330 Statistics ........................... 244 Control chart template Export ......
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Show Calibration curve/Calibration data .......................... 329 Show method .................. 328 Sign ................................ 1569 Signature rights .............. 1226 Signatures ........................ 334 Start ......................... 123, 139 Status ............................... 334 Stop ......................... 123, 139 Update ............................. 289 Variables ............................ 47 Version ...........
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Status ............................. 1280 Stepping motor controller ....................................... 1493 Subwindow .................... 1279 Titrando ......................... 1366 Titrino ............................ 1372 Tower ......... 1417, 1425, 1435, 1442 USB devices .................... 1279 Devices Connect ............................... 3 Dialog language ................... 1261 DIGITAL IN ........................... 1199 Command variables ........
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 589, 641, 668, 689, 710, 731, 753, 773, 834, 859, 871, 876, 892, 905, 917, 930, 943, 951, 969, 991 pK/HNP evaluation 458, 484, 510, 536, 563, 589, 641, 875 Potentiometric evaluation 455, 481, 508, 534, 561, 587, 613, 638 Rate evaluation ........ 834, 859 Thermometric evaluation . . 870 Evaluations Manual curve evaluation ... 311 Show evaluation lines ....... 375 Evaluation start ....................... 870 Evaluation window . 810, 834, 859 Event message .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Time(Date+Time) ................ 70 TimeToNumber .................. 74 TimeToText ........................ 75 Tinv .................................... 68 Trim ................................... 79 Functions Audit Trail ...................... 1268 G Gas ...................................... 1137 Gas flow rate ....................... 1137 Generator current ........... 780, 796 Generator electrode ....... 780, 796 Global variable Add new global variable .
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Lift position ................ 1124, 1521 Lift rate ..... 1124, 1417, 1425, 1435, 1442 Live display Application note ............... 173 Curve display .................... 173 General ............................ 171 Measured value display ..... 173 Messages ......................... 173 Properties ......................... 173 Tracks ....................... 171, 424 Live modification Method ............................ 170 Sample data ..................... 129 Logarithm .............
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Overview .......................... 922 Measure Manual Control .............. 1526 Measured value acceptance 450, 476, 502, 529, 556, 582, 608, 633 Measured value display .......... 173 Measured value window 463, 489, 515, 542, 569, 594, 620, 646 Measurement frequency ..................................... 965, 1052 Measuring commands ............
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Additional evaluations ...... 589 Additional measured values ......................................... 593 Command variables .......... 571 Fix endpoint evaluation .... 597 General/Hardware ............ 576 Overview .......................... 571 Potentiometric evaluation . 587 Start conditions ................ 579 Stop conditions ................ 585 Titration parameters ......... 582 MET Upol ............................... 623 Additional evaluations ......
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Polarization current 496, 601, 696, 739, 780, 796, 911 Polarization voltage ....................... 522, 717, 760, 924 Port ...................................... 1105 PORT .................................... 1212 Command variables ........ 1212 Overview ........................ 1212 Properties ....................... 1213 Potentiation ............................. 54 Potentiometric evaluation 455, 481, 508, 534, 561, 587, 613, 638 PREP .....................................
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Open ................................ 207 Options ............................ 220 Overview .......................... 208 Page format ..................... 213 Page number .................... 229 Page preview .................... 219 Page setup ....................... 213 Rectangle ......................... 237 Rename ............................ 206 Save ................................. 221 Selection ........................ 1156 Side margins .....................
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Sample table ............................ 97 Column display ......... 107, 160 Comment ................. 115, 168 Copying ........................... 117 Create ............................ 1601 Creating new ..................... 97 Data import .............. 113, 165 Deleting ........................... 117 Edit ................ 110, 162, 1602 Editing ................................ 98 Editing lock .............. 110, 162 Exporting ......................... 117 Importing ....
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 999, 1007, 1015, 1038, 1047, 1052 Signature Delete Signatures 2 ........................... 24, 302, 407 Display signatures ............. 301 Procedure ........................... 20 Rules .................. 19, 298, 403 Security settings ............. 1239 Signature 1 ......... 21, 298, 404 Signature 2 ......... 22, 300, 405 Signature rights .............. 1226 Single determination Data import ...................... 136 Determination parameters .......................................
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Measuring parameters .... 1015 Overview ........................ 1009 Standard addition ........... 1013 STDADD dos ........................ 1001 Command variables ........ 1001 General/Hardware .......... 1003 Measuring parameters .... 1007 Overview ........................ 1001 Standard addition ........... 1005 STDADD man ......................... 994 Command variables .......... 994 General/Hardware ............ 996 Measuring parameters ...... 999 Overview .................
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titer determination ......... 1292 Warning limits ................ 1296 Titrando Overview ........................ 1366 Properties ....................... 1366 Titration commands ............... 437 Titration direction 664, 685, 706, 726, 748, 769, 824, 850 Titration parameters 450, 476, 502, 529, 556, 582, 608, 633, 664, 685, 706, 726, 748, 769, 787, 802, 824, 850 Titration rate 450, 476, 502, 529, 556, 582, 608, 633, 660, 681, 702, 723, 745, 765, 822, 847 Titrino Overview ..........
￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Waiting time after 'Cond ok' 666, 687, 708, 729, 751, 771, 788, 803 WEIGH ................................. 1176 Command variables ........ 1176 Overview ........................ 1176 Properties ....................... 1177 Welcome ................................... 1 While loop ........................... 1185 Working sample table Column display ......... 107, 160 Comment ................. 115, 168 Creating new ................... 150 Data import ..............
| 
